Major Argument And Minor Argument On Open Relationships Analytical Essay Best Essay Help

Introduction Open relationships are relationships in which the partners are free to delve into relationships with other persons. They remain sincere and straightforward about what is happening in their personal lives. In an open relationship, two partners concur that they can partake in sexual stumbles with other persons without fault, embarrassment and envy.

The idea of open relationships is not simply a thing of the ancient times. Open relationships exist well currently (Johnson, 1960). This paper will discuss some of the pros and cons of these open relationships.

Major argument Cons of open relationships

Premise 1: Your utmost other having sex with someone else.

This falls under the class of palpable and something that can not be accentuated enough. The feeling of another person gouging your girlfriend or boyfriend is a bit annoying. The experience of both spouses dating different people is quite difficult. Problems also arise when one partner wants to have sex with the other where excuses of tiredness are likely to be terribly often. “Relationships-of all kinds-are like sand held in your hand.

Held loosely, with an open hand, the sand remains where it is. The minute you close your hand and squeeze tightly to hold on, the sand trickles through your fingers. You may hold onto some of it, but most is spilled. A relationship is like that. Held loosely, with respect and freedom for the other person, it is likely to remain intact. Held too tightly, too possessively, and the relationship slips away and is lost” (Kearl, 2009).

Premise 2: Open relationships bring relationships to a vivid end.

This is due to the presence of skirmishing, resentful and all behavioral ways that make partners feel irritated or cheerless. “Problems that subsisted in the relationship are amplified due to the passionate emotions and the additional feelings of anger towards this free relationship out rule” (Johnson, 1960).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Premise 3: Open relationship is a wrong approach of binding a stumbling relationship

Partners should not agree with open relationships. The issue of ones spouse not being pleased with bedroom issues is something the two partners should sit down and work it out.

However, if this is not possible, it is better for the two of them to break up. Under no situations, can adding more persons to this kind of relationship help if the relationship is already having issues. An open relationship, therefore, should never be understood as a way of keeping a collapsing relationship together. It is a wrong move since it is a way of solving such issues from a negative perspective.

Instead, it should be consented under positive conditions from an already joyful couple. “People having problems in their relationships should learn other ways of dealing and solving them. It is impossible to anticipate that things will get better by adding more people to the relationship. In fact, they only get worse” (Kearl, 2009).

Premise 4: Open relationships lead to polygamous marriage

Open relationships may lead to polygamous marriages which are unhealthy and which often bring about hatred and destruction. ”Such relationships are often more fluid than the traditional dating-and-marriage model of long-term relationships, and the participants in an open relationship may not have preconceptions as to its duration” (Linssen, 2010).

Premise 5: Spread of STD’S.

We will write a custom Essay on Major argument and Minor Argument on Open Relationships specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sexually transmitted diseases are on the increase today due to open relationships. “HIV/AIDS is the leading of them all” (O’Neill, 2000). This can be reduced if partners could stick to the monogamous way of relationships as it ensures safer sex than in open relationships.

Minor argument Pros of open relationships

Premise 1: New techniques of the trade

Open relationships bring back new styles to take a crack at in the bedroom. This is from practices and skills obtained from other people. Sex life becomes pretty diverse and entertaining. “Teaching each other new techniques, positions and impressions are substantial parts of open relationships” (Taormino, 2008).

Premise 2: Putting into practice ones voyeur desires

Since in open relationships, partners usually hook up with shared friends. They sometimes hook up in a similar room simultaneously “It is enjoyable observing another team while having sex” (Surhone


Difference between quality control and quality assurance Term Paper college essay help

Executive Summary Quality management involves planning, QA/QC and quality improvement. It emphasizes on product or service quality and the manner in which to attain it. It applies QA and QC processes to give consistent quality. Quality management integrates the principles of management, which are embraced by top managerial teams to guide the organization for enhanced performance. Any organization is client-oriented and keeps on researching about their apparent needs, future needs and even goes beyond their prospects.

Customer focus is achieved if there is a way to meet their quality to ensure their satisfaction. The internal environment has to be controlled by every employee to attain the overall goal of the company. Their potential is crucial for the performance of the company and this is only attained when the tasks are managed as a process. Tasks in the organization becomes of high quality by running the process as a single system through analyzing data and information.

In the competitive global marketplace, organizations have to offer products and services of high quality, and yet maintain a competitive edge in the business. Strategic and systematic processes in manufacturing give confidence to suit the product with the intended need, for better business performance (Webber


Opportunity Cost Term Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Opportunity cost

Production possibility curve (PPC)


Works Cited

Introduction Conventionally, human wants far exceed the available resources to satisfy them. Resources are always scarce in an economy and in order to satisfy human needs, it becomes imperative to make choices concerning which needs are to be satisfies first and the one’s to be deferred or forgone.

This brings in the concept of opportunity cost to show the value of the needs that need to be satisfied first and those that need to be postponed to a further date. This study will analyze the concept of opportunity cost and how individual consumers, firms, and governments utilize it to allocate scarce resources in the economy.

Opportunity cost By definition, opportunity cost is simply the cost of foregone alternatives. It is the cost of the best alternative, which has been sacrificed in order to spend the available resources on a certain need.

Individual consumers, firms and governments use this concept to ensure that the available resources are used efficiently. It measures the cost of what has been foregone in financial or monetary terms. According to Frederick, Novemsky, Wang, Dhar and Nowlis, consumers always face the issue of opportunity cost when making purchasing decision (553).

For example, a student may be in need of two textbooks; business and economics text book which cost $20 each yet his/her parent gives him only $ 20 to buy the textbooks. Given this scenario, the students cannot afford to buy the two textbooks simultaneously since the amount of money s/he has can only purchase one textbook. The student therefore has to make a prioritized choice on which textbook to buy first and which one to defer to a future date.

S/he has to apply the concept of scarcity and choice since s/he has more than one need to satisfy with just a few resources ($20). If s/he chooses to buy a business textbook, the opportunity cost will be economics textbook, which s/he will do without for the time being. If s/he happens to buy economic textbook, the opportunity cost will be business textbook that s/he has to sacrifice in order to buy the economics textbook.

Therefore, the student has no option other than to forego one of his/her needs in order to satisfy the other. The concept of opportunity cost also applies in government activities where government is faced with so many public needs yet the available resources to satisfy the needs are limited. For instance, a government may need to finance free university education and at the same to provide cheap and quality health care services.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The government is required to finance these two public needs yet the funds to meet the two expenses simultaneously are not available. The government is therefore required to postpone one of the needs in order to finance the other. Thus, opportunity cost will be the cost of the public needs that has to be postponed in order to satisfy the other. According to Devadoss and Wongun, firms also have limited factors of production, which need to be allocated efficiently to maximize the profit (729).

From the above analyses, the concept of opportunity cost is very important when individual consumers, firms, and governments are making decision on how to allocate scarce resources at their disposal in order to fulfill their endless needs (Victoravich 85). Since production resources do not increase with increase in the number of needs that need to be satisfied, increased spending in one area means decreased spending in another area. This allocation of limited resources is well illustrated by production possibility curve that shows how limited resources are allocated to varying needs in the economy.

Production possibility curve (PPC) Production possibility curve is a curve or a graph that shows how limited factors of production can be allocated between two commodities. The curve illustrates efficient production level of two commodities using a fixed factor of production. For example, governments can use PPC curve to know the most efficient way to allocate limited inputs (capital and labor) in the production of two types of commodities like maize and motor vehicles.

PPC will show what will happen to the other commodity if the government increases production of one commodity (Dalal 958). For instance, if the government increases production of motor vehicle, the PPC will show what will happen to the production maize. Therefore, PPC will help the government to know the most efficient level of production.

Conclusion The concept of opportunity cost is therefore very important while making microeconomic policies. Economic resources are always scarce and human needs are ever increasing such that, individual consumers, firms, and governments have no option but to make choices on how to allocate the available limited resources more efficiently.

Policy makers have to sacrifice or forego some needs to fulfill the most pressing ones. Governments have to consider and prioritize all its public expenditures in order to ensure that the scarce resources are allocated in the most maximizing way to the economy. The same concept will also apply to all firms that need to allocate inputs in the most efficient way in order to maximize profits.

Works Cited Dalal, Ardeshir. “The Production Possibility Frontier as a Maximum Value Function: Concavity and Non-increasing Returns to Scale.” Review of International Economics 14.5 (2006): 958-967.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Opportunity Cost specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Devadoss, Stephen, and Wongun, Song. “Factor Market Oligopsony and the Production Possibility Frontier.” Review of International Economics 11. 4 (2003): 729-744.

Frederick, Shane, Novemsky, Nathan, Wang, Jing, Dhar, Ravi and Nowlis, Stephen. “Opportunity Cost Neglect.” Journal of Consumer Research 36.4 (2009): 553-561.

Victoravich, Lisa Marie. “When Do Opportunity Costs Count? The Impact of Vagueness, Project Completion Stage, and Management Accounting.” Behavioral Research in Accounting, 22.1 (2010): 85-108.


The Haunted Palace by Edgar Allan Poe Poetry Essay essay help

The haunted palace by Edgar Allan Poe is a piece of literature that tells of a story in a number of short regular stanzas using a traditional style.

The Haunted Palace, tries to bring out a symbolic reference to human sanity, an allegory about the human mind. Poe tries to give a descriptive view to show how one can slowly begin to have ones own human sanity decaying away as he alludes to the decaying state of the palace.

One may compare the poem contents to the life experience of the writer. In his bibliography, after his father abandons his family and his mother dies, Edgar is raised in a wealthy family, but later falls out of the relationship he had with his guardian. He is seen as an intelligent man sometimes back “banners yellow, glorious, golden” (Poe 10) these are words that the poet uses to describe his perception about himself there before . As the poem goes on the sparkling glamorous experiences taking place in

“Banners yellow, glorious, golden,

On its roof did float and flow,

(This—all this—was in the olden Time long ago,)”

During old times, but towards the end of the poem the tone and experiences change. The interpretation of the poem, The Haunted Palace, can be used to depict Poe’s unstable state of mind as depression crippled his life. In the second last stanza he writes

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More But evil things, in robes of sorrow,

Assailed the monarch’s high estate.

let us mourn–for never morrow

Shall dawn upon him desolate!” These few lines basically depict the literary depression state of Poe’s mind which can be traced to a series of events and there is no hope of ever reviving his happy moments tomorrow.

Poe combines several styles to complete the poem. The main style used is imagery; he uses it to explain the figurative statements of certain aspects. The head is alluded to the palace, while all the evil spirits mentioned represent the thoughts of a human beings mind.

In the poem the poet writes “two luminous windows saw Spirits moving musically” in this statement its descriptive aspect does not really make sense for a palace to have only two windows it’s vividly representing the eyes of a human being. The sanity of a man is represented by spirits being able to move musically hence freely meaning he was then a sane man and in control of his life until evil spirits invaded the palace (head) and his mind become unstable.

He offers the allegory of the last stages of his sanity mind states as he slowly begins to become insane, he describes a wild insane laughter coming out of the door which depicts the mouth. The laughter described here can not be referenced from any kind of happiness but rather to a disturbing thought for he knows his condition is fast deteriorating and he was not going to be the same man as before

We will write a custom Essay on The Haunted Palace by Edgar Allan Poe Poetry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Through the pale door

A hideous throng rush out forever,

And laugh—but smile no more. Edgar also incorporates the use figurative speech where personification is a device that Poe uses in line four states “radiant palace-reared its head” meaning that the palace has much greater meaning.

The palace is given the human trait of the head which is the centre of human beings faculties of intellect, emotion and reasoning. More personification expressions include “a troop of echoes whose sweet duty was but to sing” the echoes describe the thoughts. These thoughts are organized and pleasant showing an individual is sane.

There are several ways one would interpret the writers work because of the several hidden aspects about the poem. The poem can also be depicting more than the sanity state of a human being to death.

In the beginning of the poem the descriptive phenomenon brings out the party feeling of a palace where evidently people are dancing and singing all of them having a wonderful time together with the king and his monarchy an illusion of some kind of a disease will not be able to get them is presently described because the palace is defined as the most safest haven until the evil spirits are able to invade the palace and soon every one dies the insane laughter can be used to represents the kings unaware of what to do he laughs perhaps because he aware that he is defeated by what he thought could not get him.

Metaphors have widely been used in the poem to hide the direct meaning of the words used. In an example, the author writes “And all with pearl and ruby glowing Was the fair palace door,” the pearl describes the teeth since pearl are white while the ruby represents the lips with is red nature that appears to be the same with the ruby and finally the door represents the mouth.. He also writes;

Through which came flowing, flowing, flowing,

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Haunted Palace by Edgar Allan Poe Poetry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More And sparkling evermore,

A troop of Echoes, whose sweet duty

Was but to sing, In voices of surpassing beauty”, these words explain that there are beautiful thoughts representing a person in a sane mind state while “The wit and wisdom of their king” describes the fact that as the king made decisions he was in his right sense of mind and that he was cautious of what he was doing. Besides metaphors, the writer also used similes to make the poem interesting to the readers “While, like a ghastly rapid river./ Through the pale door / A hideous throng rush out forever”.

All these elements have been put together in the poem to bring out an effective idyllic atmosphere that represents how a sane mind can instantly become an unstable mind. The use of his words in the poem create the atmosphere described as nightmarish and evil words used to describe this feeling include “evil dim-remembered, desolate, robes of sorrow, entombed, ghastly discordant, mourn and hideous. Further interpretation of the poem involves a line by line interpretation. As

In the greenest of our valleys

By good angels tenanted,- good thoughts

Once a fair and stately palace— a stable state mind(head)

Radiant palace—reared its head.- head

In the monarch Thought’s dominion— stable reasoning with common sense

It stood there!

Never seraph spread a pinion

Over fabric half so fair!” – Hair on the head. These lines describe the wonderful and most pleasant experience when a person has a stable mind set (head),

“Banners yellow, glorious, golden, – hair

On its roof did float and flow, – on top of the head

(This—all this—was in the olden Time long ago,) here the poet describes his perception about himself there before.

“ And every gentle air that dallied,

In that sweet day,

Along the ramparts plumed and pallid, (15) describes the sparkling glamorous experiences of the author in the olden days

“A wingèd odor went away.” The odor is the smell that comes out of a human beings mouth “Wanderers in that happy valley,” are the people who are constantly seeing the king “Through two luminous windows” alludes to the eyes of the king, “saw spirits moving musically,

To a lute’s well-tunèd law, (20)” represents the sanity of a man

Round about a throne where, sitting


In state his glory well befitting, – stable mind

The ruler of the realm was seen. – the king

And all with pearl and ruby glowing – pearl describes the teeth while the ruby represents the lips

Was the fair palace door,” the mouth (25)

“Through which came flowing, flowing, flowing,

And sparkling evermore, -sounds and organized thoughts

A troop of Echoes, whose sweet duty;

Was but to sing,

In voices of surpassing beauty;

The wit and wisdom of their king” (30) these words explain that there are beautiful thoughts representing a person in a sane mind state.

“But evil things, in robes of sorrow, – destructive components causing disruption in the mind

Assailed the monarch’s high estate- The thoughts in the head

(Ah, let us mourn!—for never morrow (35)

Shall dawn upon him desolate!)

And round about his home the glory;

That blushed and bloomed,

Is but a dim-remembered story;

Of the old time entombed (40), represents the unstable state of a human’s mind as depression crippled his life by undeserving thoughts

And travellers, now, within that valley; – people around the person

Through the red-litten windows see – blood shot eyes

Vast forms, that move fantastically;

To a discordant melody; While, like a ghastly rapid rive;

Through the pale door – mouth

A hideous throng rush out forever;

And laugh—but smile no more (Poe 45). Offers the allegory of the last stages of his sanity mind states as he slowly begins to become insane

Work Cited Poe, Allan E. The Haunted Palace. Nottingham: Nathan Brooks’ American Museum magazine, 1938. Print.


“Ousted Tunisian leader sentenced to over 15 years in prison” Essay (Article) writing essay help: writing essay help

Zine el Abidine Ben Ali was the former president of Tunisia. He had been a president since the year 1987 and served continuously as the president for 23 years.

During his reign, the country experienced difficulties which were brought about by his poor governance. There was so much corruption that the citizens could not bear it any more. Many people were jobless, food was expensive and corruption was continuously on the rise.

Demonstrations were triggered by an incident where a fruit vendor who was a jobless graduate committed suicide because his cart had been taken away by the police. They had denied him a chance to make a living through the business of selling fruits using the cart and were looking for a way to exploit him.

Many Tunisians were leading frustrated lives. The demonstrations which followed this incident cost about 300 hundred lives while about 700 people were wounded. Ben Ali who was the president tried to defend himself by saying that he had given out his best and his governance was directed to serve the Tunisians. His objectives were to develop the country to modernity.

The president was accused of harboring unlawful weapons, archeological artifacts and illicit drugs which were found in his country’s presidential palace. The president fled to Saudi Arabia in search of refuge together with his wife, Leila Trabelsi. Saudi Arabia in this context played a role which can be viewed to be against the wishes of the general Tunisians.

The trial that charged him with 15 and a half years imprisonment was conducted in his absence. His wife was also charged with 20 years of imprisonment. They were together fined $65 million. People who were close associates of the president were charged and are facing various sentences.

The Saudi Arabia government hosted Ben Ali because they thought that friends should be there for each other at all times. The Saudi Arabia welcome of Ben Ali and his family was a mockery to Tunisians. They had worked so hard to get corruption out of their country but justice was not fulfilled.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ben Ali’s escape to another country could suggest that he was indeed guilty and was afraid to face the charges. If he was not guilty, he would not be afraid to face the charges. Most of Saudi Arabia citizens did not support hosting of criminals. It was not their opinion but the president’s opinion.

Saudi Arabia acceptance of Ben Ali is can be viewed in the light of the Saudi Arabia government being unfair and inconsiderate of the harm that Ben Ali had caused to Tunisians. Such kind of a stand on the part of the government of Saudi Arabia can has a huge potential of straining the relation between the governments of Tunisia and Saudi Arabia. As a matter of fact, there are other countries which are against the action carried out by the Saudi Arabia government.

This action by the government of Saudi Arabia has violated democracy; it is most likely that the relationship would yield negative results. It is worth pointing out that the government of Saudi Arabia has shown such tendency of harboring criminal in the past and thus obstructing justice from being executed. It should be recalled that Idi Amin was ousted from Uganda and sought refuge in Saudi Arabia.

Idi Amin was never brought to justice and yet he had killed so many Uganda citizens as well as Israelites and Asians during his terror reign. Idi Amin died in Saudi Arabia; the government of Saudi Arabia should stop protecting criminals and let justice have its way. Saudi Arabia is an Islamic nation and Muslims are not known to obstruct justice thus the Saudi Arabia government should live up to the spirit of the Islamic religion and hand over Ben Ali.


Unions and Management Report best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Effects of Unions in Organizations

Role of Management in an Organization

Role of Unions in Organizations

Maintaining Conducive Working Relationships

Role of Union in Management of Organizations



Introduction Unions are formed to protect the rights of the members. Some organizations feel that unions are a stumbling block to their progress. In most cases conflicts arise between Trade unions and organization management. An analysis of the effect of unions on organizations shows that unions can be profitable or disadvantageous to an organization.

Effects of Unions in Organizations Unions affect the management of an organization either positively or negatively. Unions determine the number of workers who are employed in an organization. This brings to a rise of the workers’ salaries and wages but reduces opportunities of employment. Unions also speak out for the employees so as to increase their pay and conversely reduce the profits of the company. Though they are advantageous their disadvantage is that they affect the economy negatively by causing an escalation of prices in consumer goods and services at the expense of providing higher earnings to the employees (Sherk, 2011).

Role of Management in an Organization Good Management in an organization is vital for the achievement of its goals. It is the authority of any organization. Management is responsible for employing the workforce. Once they are employed, they should train them to be proficient so as to produce higher output from their work. Management should delegate duties to the employees and encourage them to do their best. They should ensure that all activities in the organization are legal and promote a healthy social environment (Mintzberg, 2009).

The management should lead the organization. They should supervise and monitor all operations in every department. Management should handle every type of problem that may come up at the work place. Managers should be entrepreneurs who come up with projects and work them through successfully. They should allocate resources appropriately so as to take care of the employees’ needs, materials and at the end make some profits. Managers should also be negotiators of their organization (Mintzberg, 2009).

Role of Unions in Organizations “A trade union is an organization based on membership of employees in various trades, occupations and professions, whose major focus is the representation of its members at the workplace and in the wider society” Trade Unions team up with organizations management so as to maintain associations between them (TradeUnion, n. d).

The fact that trade unions’ leaders have a huge back in the unions’ members, the leaders can equally have a huge influence in the politics. Trade union leaders use the back up they have in the union members to play a role in formulating labor policies. This way, they are able to access funds from the government to improve welfare of the members. Trade unions usually determine political decisions through their leaders who are professionals such as lawyers and engineers (TradeUnion, n. d.).

Unions have an influence on the market. They determine the amount of finances to be used on employees so as to determine the prices of the goods and services provided by the organization. This makes the organizational goods to be competitive in the market. Trade unions work towards betterment of the employees (TradeUnion, n.d.).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Trade unions have a regulatory role in organizations. They regulate standards of working conditions to all members. They, therefore, protect workers by ensuring that they are not exploited by the employers. The effectiveness of a trade union determines its strength capacity in influencing an organization. Some unions share power with the organization to deal with “grievances, discipline, job evaluation, redundancy, work changes, safety and health and rights to negotiate terms and conditions” (TradeUnion, n.d., p. 1).

Trade Unions are also important in providing training for organizations. Individual interests include provision of equal rights, how to prevent sexual insults, harassments and provision of medication for those with chronic illnesses (TradeUnion, n.d.).

Unions encourage democracy. By providing good terms and conditions for the employees, they encourage their participation in the union. As they become more involved, they are able to get the best leaders for organizations. The workers are therefore a source of influence. Unions also enable employees to participate in decision making. This is in contrast to most of the past systems where employees who opposed any decisions or came up with new ideas were fired (TradeUnion, n.d.).

Unions provide services to their members. These include, “housing, land lease schemes, transport and service stations, launder mats, cinemas, stores, insurance programmes and other schemes” (TradeUnion, n. d., p. 1). Unions also help workers to get pensions through financial firms. This money accumulates and makes profits over a long period of time. Other services include legal representation and medical services (TradeUnion, n.d.).

Unions play a developmental role in organizations. They do this by developing the workforce. Members including youths, women and the elderly are given responsibilities which help them to develop leadership and professional skills. This brings their promotion from low levels to higher levels in management. This strategy promotes maximum utilization of potential and talent of employees (Mintzberg, 2009).

Unions provide welfare services to the organization members. These include “employment of those with disabilities, family services such as baby crèches, child care centers, old people’s homes and play and recreation centers” (TradeUnion, n.d.).

Maintaining Conducive Working Relationships An organization can maintain favorable working relationships by promoting effective communication in the organization and maintaining excellent connection with the union. Effective communication comes when employees are aware of the policies that exist in the organization. This means that employees require training. Employees should also understand their responsibility in case of any conflict at the workplace.

We will write a custom Report on Unions and Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Managers should also maintain justice at all times. Whenever there is a dispute even in terms of finances they should handle them effectively. Communication becomes more effective if there is no any discrimination at the work place. It is also important to honor all the agreements made by the organization. Managers should also ensure that employees have first hand information concerning any developmental changes taking place in their organization (Resource, 2011).

The relationship between the organization and the union is very important in that when any dispute gets out of hand, it can be handed over to the union (Resource, 2011).

Managers should have an action plan that should be a guide at the work place. Plans differ according to the nature of organizations. The action plan should evaluate the present activities and develop policies that increase the working conditions of the employees. By this, every employee is well informed of his/her duties or responsibilities.

The plan should also focus on all people without discrimination including people with disabilities. The plan should also “address all barriers including physical, information, communication and attitudinal barriers” (Austrarian, n.d., p. 1).

Role of Union in Management of Organizations Unions and management of organizations should emphasize on the significance of effective communication in the organization. They should come up with ways to support productivity and competitiveness of the organizations. This positively affects the organization managers by encouraging their participation. This can be at both national and enterprise levels. Unions should also ensure that they build trust in organizations. The Unions should focus on development of social capital at enterprise level (TradeUnion, n.d.).

Unions should assist organizations to get contracts. They should also help the organization to create awareness to all employees in the organization by helping them know their rights. The unions should also represent organizations in various contracts. They can effectively deal with disciplining issues of the employees and eliminate issues of injustice at the work place. They also have a legal role to play for the organizations by ensuring that they are not subjected to any unfair judgment (TradeUnion, n.d.).

Conclusion Depending on the strategies used by the organization it can yield positive or negative results. Management of the organization needs to know its stand and strike a balance on the influence by the union. Unions should also strive to be beneficial to the organizations that they serve. Communication is the key strategy to maintain conducive working relationships and environment. This is because Unions have a great influence on organizations.

References Austrarian. Developing an Effective Action Plan. HREOC. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Unions and Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Mintzberg, H. (2009). Ten Management Roles. SAYECONOMY. Web.

Resource. (2011). Strategic Human Resource. Strategic Human Resource. Web.

Sherk, J. (2011). What Unions Do: How Labor Unions Affect Jobs and the Economy. Heritage. Web.

Trade Union. The Function and Role of Trade Union. Ilocarib. Web.


Islamic Religion and Its Influence on the Society Research Paper best college essay help

Introduction Africa is one of the largest homes to Muslims because many of them live in Africa. Islam means submission and peace and Muslims live a peaceful life by submitting to Allah. Hollins (64) argues that a Muslim is any person following Islamic laws. According to Islam traditions, Allah sent angel Gabriel to reveal His word to Mohammed hence becoming the messenger of Allah.

The Qur’an is a holy book with Allah’s revelations and teachings that dictates the core beliefs and cultures of the Islamic community. According to Center for Health Disparities, the Islam faith is among monotheistic religions such as Judaism and Christianity (2).

The objective of this paper is to understand Islam as a religion, the way it affects its followers and the way in which its followers view the world in general. Morocco is an Arab country whose main religion is Islam. The laws of the country are set based on the religion that is also used to govern spiritual, social, and political aspects as Mernissi points out (3).

Morocco is derived from a word in Arabic language “al-maghrib-al-asqsa” that means far west. McGuiness argues that the value systems, beliefs and practices of Moroccans are culturally assimilated in Arab and Berber Muslim traditions (494). In addition, the history of Islam in Morocco started in the desert oases of Arabia in the 17th century A.D. Christians and Jews first inhabited the region. The Quran and Prophet Mohammed Teachings dictate the Muslim culture and practices.

Islamic Traditions and Cultures The traditions and practices of the Muslim culture are enshrined in the Holy Qur’an. Khan gives some of the forbidden practices and normal way of life. Food plays a vital role and meaning in the Islam religious life because eating is one way of worshipping Allah (108). There are two types of foods. The Halal, which is food that is accepted before Allah and Haram, the food prohibited by the Muslim faith. Some of the other things that are prohibited by the Qur’an include:

charging interests on loans and using usury is prohibited

The Qur’an forbids a husband from taking dower from his wife in cases of a divorce. Dower is a gift that a wife gets with no conditions attached.

Alcohol, nicotine, drugs and other by-products from these elements are not allowed.

Pork and its by-products are prohibited.

Muslims women are not supposed to wear tight clothes that portray their skin and shape. They are required to cover all parts of the body except hands. Some cover their faces with veil and it varies from country to country. Men cover their bodies from the knee to the neck with caps covering the heads.

No one has the right to take life because life is sacred. Therefore, suicide is a serious offence before Allah

The expression of Islamic art is architecture that is depicted in the way houses, buildings and mosques are constructed. Islam is rich in theology and several spiritual practices that Muslims follow in their day-to-day walk.


A prayer plays a central part in the life a Muslim. Muslims have different types of prayers such as personal prayers that can be said anywhere and anytime and ritual prayers that are conducted in a specific manner with special words kneeling and facing ka’bab the direction of the holy city in Mecca.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Prophet Abraham built Ka’bab and it is cubical in shape. The ritual prayers are said 5 times in a day, in the morning, midday, mid afternoon, sunset and before going to bed. The prayers are offered in mosques on Friday and only men are allowed to attend the prayers. There are no chairs in the mosques and worshippers kneel down during their services, shoes are not allowed, as it is a holy place. Before any ritual, they have to wash their faces, hands and feet before approaching Allah.


In 622 C E, Prophet Mohammed saved himself from his enemies who were after his life by running and hiding in the holy city of Medina. Mecca is a central part of a Muslim life and they go to pay homage to the place that is closely related to the life of their prophet. The Qur’an encourages its followers to participate in the annual pilgrimage visit.


Fasting is a very important practice that Muslims perform once a month annually during the month of Ramadan that starts after the full moon. During Ramadhan, the faithful abstain from taking food and drinks from dawn to dusk.


The Quran encourages Muslims to be responsible and kind to the less fortunate people in the society and there is a mandatory contribution of zakat by Muslim faithful to be taken to the less fortunate people in the society. Islam as a religion has a holistic approach to life with major implications to men and women in Morocco.

The Islamic law transcends the modern system of law as it is a way of life and therefore sacred. Mernessi believes that Islamic law (sharia) denies people an opportunity to alter the bad laws as it will be questioning Allah’s wisdom. For instance, changing personal law is errant behavior (dalala) and the punishment of dalala is hell (2).

How religion affects human health or health care system. The Center for Health Disparities believes that Muslim health practices vary depending on their ethnicity rather than religion (3). Culture shapes and promotes how people behave and it can affect either someone’s health positively or negatively.

For instance, Islamic laws encourage the male to have more than one sexual partner while it is unlawful for females to have more than one partner and this places the woman prone and be infected with sexually transmitted diseases such HIV/AIDs. Men have a greater access to health more than the women do. Sen indicates that the failure to give women attention and care when sick results to fewer women surviving, than men who are given food, social and medical attention (61).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Islamic Religion and Its Influence on the Society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More How religion affects roles in men and women Moroccan laws and culture are derived from the Qur’an and it clearly states the rights and roles of women and men in the society and their various positions. Sura states “Allah charges you on providing for your children; to the male the equivalent of two female” (Sen 61). This means what a man has is double of what a woman has. Males should provide financial support and care.

In Sura 4:34, “Men are in charge of women, Allah made one of them to be better than the other and good women are obedient” (Sen 61) this puts the men to be superior of women and the men should be masters over women.

Prophet Mohammed, who is a superior being and a role model, believes women are less intelligent and not so, religious and a country that elects a woman ruler is doomed to fail. Male leaders are encouraged to take senior positions in the organizations. Women as the lesser being are treated like slaves and cleanliness, housework is a woman duty. Moroccan labor laws have many restrictions on employment applying to children and women below the age of 16 and this discourages the women folk as they have also to do the house chores fully.

How religion affects Educational system Islam plays a role in the development of the curriculum and students choice in selecting subjects. Westerlund and Rosander argue that schools are putting more emphasis in training languages and History, Mathematics and Geography (8).

Women in Morocco are supposed to be passive in accepting the status quo. Many educated Moroccan women have started fighting for their rights by established several women’s rights movements to try to improve their situation.

For instance, in the urban areas women movements are working to change some articles in the law, they want to reduce the gap between sharia and democracy, in terms of freedom of speech, thoughts and movement, however in Islamic there is never room for freedom. The personal law called mudawwanah, which is based on Islamic Sharia, forms the biggest challenge in the women’s struggle towards equality.

Education disrupts the status quo of Islamic traditions as women are perceived to be less intelligent and they should depend entirely to the male, but education empowers women and they make them at par socially and professionally with their male counterparts which challenges the traditions. According to Rassam (171) says insubordination of women in public sphere and being forced in their cocoons at home has reduced women in public domain

How religion affects marriage, pregnancy, and birth giving Sura 4:3 states “Muslims are encouraged to marry more than one wife so long as the women are nice” (Sen 61). In Islamic laws, women are seen as sex objects and dangerous seducers. The Qur’an says women can change the destiny of a man by distracting him from worshipping Allah. Marriage is the most important event for a Moroccan woman in her lifetime, but despite how a woman views the event, she does not take part and is very absent in preparation of the marriage and wedding, she is a passive party.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Islamic Religion and Its Influence on the Society by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Women in Morocco get married at a tender age of 14-16 years of age, the bride does not choose the suitor and it is the work of the father, guardian or any male relative. As Qur’an commands in Sura 4:25 “wed them by permission of the folks” Mernissi (4). Mernissi believes in Moroccan marriage is not an agreement between the couple but between the two men (suitor and father) who are in control of the marriage arrangements.

The country laws states that women are an inferior being and they cannot make crucial decisions in their marriages and are a possession of the male, with no freedom to act on their own.

Virginity is a virtue in the Moroccan law when getting married. If a bride is not a virgin, the groom is allowed to leave her and sometimes, the bride wealth can be slashed into half, and the code of “Honor and Shame” is so much emphasized on women. Birth control is prohibited in the Muslim culture and family planning in form of birth control is discouraged. When a Muslim woman gives birth, the parents take the placenta and buried according to the Muslim burial rituals.

Women must be obedient to their husbands and the husbands can marry as many wives as he feels. He has overall control over his wife; for instance if the wife leaves her matrimonial home the man has a right to forcefully bring the wife back and fidelity is required from women and not the man. Women have a right to sexual attention in marriage but cannot abstain or refuse the husband when he wants sex unless she is menstruating.

Conclusion Islam religion believes only Allah should be worshipped and Mohammed is the only Prophet of Allah. Islamic affects the society in all spheres of life, socially, economically and politically. Quran specify that women are the lesser being and it is becoming a challenge to change the retrogressive cultures like discriminating and violence against women as it will be questioning Allah.

The Moroccan states laws restricts women and children below the age of 16 from applying for formal employment and therefore woman end up doing household chores only. Furthermore, the Islamic region allows man to marry up to four wives provided the man can provide for all of them. Finally, the religion does not allow birth control and therefore, women are forced to have as many children as the husband wants. We see that the religion is biased particularly towards women.

Works Cited Center for Heath Disparities. Wellness


Wal-Mart’s Discrimination Difficulties Essay (Article) essay help free: essay help free

Wal-Mart is probably the largest private employer in the United States of America. Over the years it has been accused of discrimination in selection, recruitment, and employment of suitable applicants. Lawsuits have been filed against Wal-Mart by employees and other lobbyists groups demanding the end of discrimination.

According to the case file Wal-Mart is accused of violating the Equal Employment Opportunity laws. According to the laws every body has equal employment opportunity regardless of their gender, sex, National origin, religion, color and physical disability among many others. From the case files employees have been discriminated against because of their color, race and gender.

For example, it is evident that for more than seven years blacks had been discriminated because of their color and denied employment as truck drivers. Because of this a lawsuit was filed against Wal-Mart and they promised to hire the applicants and employee them. This case on the drivers other than violating equal employment based on color, it can also be seen as discrimination against the minorities.

Wal-Mart also discriminated job applicants on the basis of gender. It is clear from the case file that female job applicants were turned down for jobs in the distribution centers on grounds that they were female and they were not needed. According to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission the allegations were true and a verdict was reached that concluded that there was a statistical pattern that showed male employees being hired more than women.

To make the case more valid a female applicant who had been turned down in Wal-Mart was employed for the same job position in a different company. The above cases are pure evidences of discrimination at the work place on the basis of gender, color and race (minorities). As a result, the company agreed to pay the plaintiff a certain amount and promised to employee more women and the minority groups.

Wal-Mart stores could have avoided the charges by following the law and provisions in the Equal Employment Opportunity Act. By following the provisions there would be no allegations and lawsuits filed against. Turning down male applicants because they are black is clear race and color discrimination that could have been avoided through employing them in a statistically and consistent manner.

On the case of against women, the company could have specified that men were required because of the type of the job in the warehouse. This would not have attracted women applicants in the first place thus having no case. It would also have employed women in a statistically significant ways such that no loop holes in employment pattern were availed. By setting discrimination policies during the inception of the company would have eliminated the discrimination lawsuits.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is because discrimination would not have been present in the first place, thus avoiding it. Lastly the utterances by one of the recruiters that women are not needed would have stopped the issue of discrimination. This is because if policies on discrimination had been established in Wal-Mart Company that recruiter could not have uttered those words.

Wal-Mart is faced with the challenges of diversifying its top management team and discrimination charges ending. The two challenges are difficult but the one on discrimination seems to be more difficult to face.

After numerous charges have been filed against to the law courts on issues of discrimination on Wal-Mart, individuals, lobbyists groups and the Wal-Mart’s watch and the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission have been on fore front in fighting for the end of discrimination.

An article by the Reuters dated June 21, 2011 has showed that, although Wal-Mart had won a case that was filed against by based on class action status, people have vowed to continue filling charges.

This is a challenge because the cases will not be ending and more charges may be filled. Reuters (June 11, 2011) note that the lawyers representing plaintiff warned that it could be possible for Wal-Mart to face lengthier litigation process in different courtrooms. With no doubt, Wal-Mart is to be faced with more lawsuits because the Equal Employment Opportunity commission has showed support on the workers of Wal-Mart and other retail stores.

According to the case files the verdict of the EEOC concluded that there was a trend of discrimination meaning that the problem has been there. It is also clear that the challenge of discrimination is embedded in the system and management of Wal-Mart. To end the instances of discrimination charges the management has to adapt a strategy that recognizes the EEOA. If this is not adopted then the challenges of court battles on discrimination will not end.

It seems that the top management of the Wal-Mart’s company is male dominated with less women managers, minority groups, and the disabled. With only a fourth of the top managers being managers, then problems of discrimination are less likely to end.

We will write a custom Article on Wal-Mart’s Discrimination Difficulties specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In my opinion, diversification of the Wal-Mart’s Executives and managers has high probability of avoiding instances of discrimination. Although the company has set up a women committee to come up with strategies of bringing women managers and executives, more has to be done. With women in top ranks, it would be easy to employ women in the company.

This is because women will be more vocal and be involved in selection and recruitment process of employees. They can champion for the women to have the same chances and opportunities as male applicants. In another instance having the disabled, minorities, people of different color and race in the management, it would be possible to avoid discrimination because employees are well represented.

The diversified management would have one voice and has the likelihood of representing all the employees in the work place. Diversification of executives in the Wal-Mart management would also ensure diversification among the employees at lower management levels and subordinates. This would eliminate any discrimination instance because all employees are well presented.

In conclusion, the Wal-Mart violated the laws and provisions that are under the Equal Employment Opportunity that protects the employees and applicants from any instances of discrimination either based on gender, race, color, physical disability among others.

The charges filed against by the employees could have been avoided if the company had policies that prohibited discriminations, followed the provisions and laws provided in the Equal Employment Opportunity Act, and employed the employees in first place or stating categorically that the positions available were male jobs.

Between the challenges of discrimination and diversification of executives, the latter is the greatest problem because a lot of lawsuits have been laid so far. It is also clear that the issue has not been well addressed. Diversification of employees can avoid discrimination in the sense that, all people regardless of their color, physical ability, race, and gender would be represented in the workplace and applicants have a chance of getting a job.

Works Cited Reuters. Wal-Mart wins Supreme Court sex-bias ruling. 2011. Web.


The Effects of Media Violence on People Argumentative Essay essay help online

Despite the fact that there is some evidence that, lengthy exposure to violent media increases aggressive behavior in people, this exposure alone cannot cause people to become violent and aggressive for there is no established connection between violent entertainment and violent behavior.

On the contrary, there is substantial evidence that violent, belligerent, and emotionally delinquent environments lead to aggressive behavior more than watching violent films does. This may be a contentious issue with numerous people linking violent media to aggressive behavior. Nevertheless, there are other people, as the writer, who think that exposure to violent media alone does not lead to increase in aggressive behavior. I strongly refute the claims that exposure to violent media leads to increase in violent behavior.

First, the research methodologies used to study and analyze the link between violent media exposure and aggressive behavior are more than often flawed. According to Gauntlett, mainstream researchers approach the issue of violent media from the perspective that media causes violence (23).

With this ingrained deeply in researchers’ minds, they seek to establish violent reactions only in the context of media consumption. The anticipated results in such a case would obviously place blame increase in aggressive behavior on exposure to violent media. This should not be the case as research should start by focusing on the violence itself; regardless of the cause, and then try to mire its causes.

This approach would work better to produce results that are more credible. Moreover, most of the studies focus on children without using controls like adults. Most of these studies seek to qualify a “barely-concealed conservative ideology” (Gauntlett 45). To complicate the whole issue, what researchers may consider as ‘violent’ in research premises, may not be violent in context of the viewer. Additionally, the research objects are based on former studies that used blemished methodologies not founded on theory.

Supporters of allegations that exposure to violent media leads to aggressive behavior may be quick to point out cases like the media attention generated by Michael Johnson case. It is true that this case attracted much publicity but these critics forget to indicate that this is not always the case.

Human beings are not copycats and they will draw a clear line between what is good and bad. It is true that there are copycat violent acts like murder and suicide among others. However, Barker posits that, these copycat violent acts occur mostly in abnormal fostering (56). Research indicates that, raising people in violent or aggressive environments will have great impact in life than mere watching of given movies or listening to some music. There is enough evidence to show that most of copycat murderers are mentally unstable.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It beats logic to assume that simply because people have seen violent acts, they will go ahead and commit them. Millions of people watch violent movies all over the world; therefore, if exposure to violent media increases aggressive behaviors then we would have millions of aggressive people world allover.

This is not the case and research indicates that, only few people engage in aggressive behaviors as a direct result of watching violent movies. Moreover, people who watch these movies in their childhood grow up to be normal responsible people (Ward 87). Therefore, to claim that exposure to violent media leads to increased aggressive behavior hold no substance to qualify it.

People like Elizabeth Newson have drawn a strong link between violent media and violent lifestyle. For instance, in 1994, Elizabeth made reported that the movie Child’s Play 3 caused two boys, aged 10, to murder James Bulger. Nevertheless, in response to these allegations, Barker indicates that, Elizabeth’s accounts relied greatly on opinions and press instead of relying on results from an independent research (63).

This points out how flawed research on media violence can be. In the murder of James Bulger, there was no evidence that the two boys had watched the alleged film. Unfortunately, after something pops into the media, people accept it without taking a step further to investigate the credibility of the information. Ward posits that, many researches on violent media have failed to establish adverse effects and that most of the hypotheses have proved to be null (12).

There are cases whereby people have reacted violently even without watching violent scenes in the media. For instance, after watching the evening news, a father kills his entire family using a gun; he is arrested and brought before the judge; he explains that his actions emanated from the ‘bad’ news he watched.

He claims that, the news was too bad that he saw no need of anyone living. Is this case different from any other violent behaviors arising from violent media? The answer is of course no! In this incidence, the man must have been abnormal and his actions cannot be explained entirely under the pretext of ‘bad news’ he watched.

Similarly, the few cases of violent behavior arising from watching violent films cannot be explained by the fact that the assailant had watched a violent film. There has to be something more than watching violent films and this is where researchers fail in their work.

We will write a custom Essay on The Effects of Media Violence on People specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to Barker, there are other factors as socio-cultural issues in criminal cases. These factors cannot be dictated by watching of violent media only. “We must look beyond a specific film to think about the specific context in which it has been consumed, and the wider social background of the people” (29).

We cannot explicitly say that this issue on media can cause or cannot cause aggressive behavior. The best thing is to probe what other factors as social issues make some people perceive and use media in a way that will bring aggression to them. The bottom line is; influence from violent media alone cannot lead to increase in aggressive behavior.

To cap it all, the research on violent media is minimal and often utilizes flawed methodologies. Questioning the credibility of these methodologies, Ward said, “The real puzzle is that anyone looking at the research evidence in this field could draw any conclusions about the pattern let alone argue with such confidence and even passion that it demonstrates the harm of violence on television, in film and in video games” (34).

According to Barker, if exposure to violent media leads to increase in aggressive behavior, then America would be a violent state (68) because in contemporary times, the media is littered with violent scenes of sundry and diversity. In the US, crime up surged between 1965 and 1980 and this was attributed to violent media. The authorities responded appropriately and crime rates leveled around 1992. Since then, violent media is allover and there is no equal increase in crime rates.

The way out of this long-standing misconception about violent media is to conduct more conclusive research works. Research should be independent and should use credible sources not just opinions and sentiments from the press.

Most of the films that are violent have political themes and this may explain in part why many people do not like them. Nevertheless, people should be informed about what is happening around them. In this regard, we should not criminalize some informative and entertaining sentiments in the media like violent films or movies.

Therefore, we can see that, although evidence suggests prolonged exposure to violent media increases aggressive behavior in people, that exposure alone does not cause people to become violent and aggressive for two main reasons. First, there is no established connection between violent entertainment and violent behavior. Additionally, there is enough evidence to show that violent environment leads to violent behaviors more than violent media does.

Works Cited Barker, Mitchell. The Newson Report: a Case Study in Common Sense in III Effects in The Media /Violence Debate. London: Routledge, 2001.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Effects of Media Violence on People by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Gauntlett, Dean. Ten Things Wrong with the ‘Effects Model’, Approaches to Audiences – A Reader, 1998. Web.

Ward, Michael. Video games, Crime


The Army’s Financial Needs Essay argumentative essay help

My organization, the army, is structured in a hierarchical mode where employees are appointed positions in the company according to their level of education and amount of experience. Thus, employees with higher levels of education and immense working experience are the ones at the top of the hierarchy. For instance, the general is the most senior followed by lieutenant general then major general and so on.

Despite the army being an organization concerned with the country’s security, it also has to consider investment opportunities to generate additional income. For this reason, real estate development as a long-term investment project presents an appropriate investment venture for the organization (Damodaran, 2001).

This also requires long-term investment decisions and techniques (Damodaran, 2001). This, however, comes with the issue of capital, i.e., whether to finance the project with equity or debt. In case the army settles on equity, it also has to decide if it will pay dividends to shareholders or not. Apart from real estate investment, the army can also invest in short term borrowing and lending amongst its members as a way of taking care of the financial welfare of its members.

For the real estate project, getting funds is a difficult task that has to be addressed carefully. The army has to evaluate its financial needs in order to raise the appropriate type of capital that would suit its needs of creating, developing and growing its business best (Damodaran, 2001). After evaluating the organization’s financial needs, one would believe that the best funding method for this project is equity.

This would be achieved through collecting seed money from members who are interested in the investment. Seed money funding refers to members investing funds needed to establish a business (Damodaran, 2001). However, this option is impractical for this organization since not all members are always interested in investing in new projects hence the organization would not raise much from members contributions. Therefore, bank loan remains the most appropriate funding source for this project.

I have settled on the debt option (bank loan) for various reasons. First, interest rates and repayment terms offered by most banks are bearable due to competition between banking institutions making them ‘loan-friendly’ (Bruce, 2003). Besides, bank loans are readily available as opposed to having to raise the money from members, making it a fast funding option (Bruce, 2003).

Third, the army is a reputable organization and has good working relationship with financial institutions hence can easily meet the bank’s lending criteria and can be guaranteed lower interest rates and easy repayment terms. Fourth, the organization urgently needs the funds and this can only be obtained from the bank as it will take time to collect money from its members. Last, but not least, the banks rarely require collateral for real estate development loans hence making it an appropriate source of funding for the project (Harvey, 2002).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For the second project, short term borrowing and lending, the army would use profits accrued from the real estate project, i.e., equity (Campbell and Gray, 1997). This would mean that the organization reinvests its profits and end up generating more funds as the members would be charged a small interest on the money lent to them.

This project would take the form of members’ union where members make contributions to the union and this added with the profits from the real estate project form the main capital for this project. I believe this is the most appropriate funding option for the second project as it does not require much capital compared to the first project. Besides, it would be inappropriate for the organization to consider debt option for such a project.

References Bruce, J. F. (2003). Investment Performance Measurement. New York: Wiley.

Campbell, R. H. and Gray, S. (1997). Investment Decisions and Capital Budgeting. Oxford University Press.

Damodaran, A. (2001). Corporate Finance: Theory and Pratice (2nd ed). New York: John Wiley


New product: Laptop assembling machinery Nokia Corporation Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Risk



Public relations

Change resistance


When undertaking a capital investment, a company needs to be keen on the project to ensure that the project will be successful and to the benefit of the company. In the case of Nokia Corporation, adopting a laptop assembling machinery will assist the company make laptops with are fast selling in modern technology driven environment. The following are the main challenges that the company is likely to get:

Risk There are chances that the machinery the company will adopt is not up to date with the current technology or alternatively it may not remain relevant for long periods of time before other systems better machines have been adopted. This may mean that the technology may become obsolete before the machine has yielded maximum result to the company. Another risk comes with the adoption is the chances that the demand of laptops will not be lasting; this will mean that the machine will remain idle in the company.

Currently, there are high chances that the company will b e sold some counterfeit machinery that will injure the company financially and even reputational wise, the machinery may thus end up injuring the company instead of improving its business and operation (McCracken, 2005)

Politics Projects are affected by internal politics, organizational behavior and culture, when a proposal has been presented for approval, chances that some people will feel that it should not be implemented for various issues. Some may even want the finances be diverted for other projects or alternatively feel that there should be a certain way they should be followed for implementation, chances that some people will argue to benefit from the project are high leading to the delay or failure of the project (Lefley, 1997).

Costs With current changes in global environments, and the capitalist economies that the world has adopted, there are chances that the project will be rated higher than it should be. This will work against chances that it will give its returns to the company as expected. When a project has been rated higher or have consumed higher than the expected rate, there are chances that the project may injure the company.

Some people inside the company may have the ill mind of overstating the project’s costs for their own benefit, this happens at the expense of the company that depends on the project for furtherance of business. To get financial gains from the company, the management will have the challenge of factoring the costs of initiation of the project to the final products that will be made as a result (Nthes, 2003)

Public relations When the company has adopted new machinery, which somehow is not in line with the primal business of the company, some stakeholders may not go well with the situation, they are likely to think that the business has changed to their disadvantage. Again, the shareholders may be called upon to give in some inputs in terms of capital injection or they may suffer a reduced return as the company finances the project, when this happens, then there are chances that the company’s reputation will be changed negatively.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Change resistance The machinery adoption may face a change resistance from employees whop might wonder whether it has come to replace them or change the way they operate, when faced with such resistance, then chance of its success will be minimal (Advanced Excel Business Center, 2008).

References Advanced Excel Business Center. (2008). Internal rate of return. Web.

ANthes, G. (2003) ROI guide: Net present value. Web.

Lefley, F. (1997). Modified internal rate of return: Will it replace IRR?. Management Accounting, 75(1), 64-65.

McCracken, M.E. (2005) Capital budgeting. Web.


Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) Essay (Article) best essay help

Written by Cohan and Johnson in 2011, the article Transferring Classroom Knowledge to Real-World Accounting: The Saving Loans Crisis seeks to determine the extent to which the accounting students apply the concepts and principles of accounting learnt in classroom to real complex situations.

In addressing this, the authors analyze the issues of regulatory accounting principle (RAP) versus generally accepted accounting principle (GAAP) in terms of their implications to saving and loans (S


Should drivers of automobiles be prohibited from using cellular phones? Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

The act of driving is an issue of life and death, both of which have an equal chance of happening. However, since none wishes to die, it suffices to declare anything that might result to death out of bounds.

Communicating over the phone comes in as an experience that all people, both young and old, enjoy. Although all have the right to utilize the technology to the maximum, the situation or the environment that one is in significantly determines whether he/she has the right to use it. Drivers of automobiles for instance have every reason to use cellular phones.

However, restrictions are equally important when put in place to check their use and to ensure that they use it appropriately. Many of the accidents and road carnages reported over the world result from reckless driving brought about by cellular phone use by drives when driving. The technology, which seeks to quicken and enhance the communication process, has deprived many innocent people of their lives.

It is all about cellular phones. Whether drivers should use cellular phones or not still rages with majority suggesting the prohibition of their use of the phones while driving. Based on the working evidence that the paper tables, I too strongly support the prohibition of using cellular phones by the automobiles drivers.

Use of cellular among drivers has been cited as one of the leading causes of accidents and highway carnages. Many drivers and commuters have succumbed to their lives because of cellular phones misuse by drivers.

For instance, a schoolwork conducted by the University of South Carolina on the effects of chatting and listening on cell phones showing how it interferes with the visual tasks like driving provides a good insight to understanding the dangers that drivers risk when they drive and use cellular phones simultaneously. Dr. Amit, the researcher, found out that speaking and planning to speak requires some concentration and therefore demands more brains resources to listen (University of South Carolina Para.3).

These experiments clearly suggest that the driver may be distracted and even lose control of the vehicle since the brain, and hence the eyes, will not be concentrating on the act of driving. Reports of the national highway traffic and safety administration also indicate that around 25 per cent of the accidents caused on the roads are because of distractions. This statistics clearly speak for itself.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Use of cellular phones is one of the causes of distractions that have contributed to these accidents. Most of the people, drivers included, have access to cellular phones due to their affordability. However, while using them is not a problem, the circumstance that a driver finds him/her when his/her phone rings should largely determine whether to respond or not, if at all the issue of road accidents has to be dealt with to the latter.

Drivers also concern the US Departments of transportation about the ever-increasing usage of phones. The practice on the other hand exposes the passengers to much fear based on what can happen if the call carries away the minds of the driver. The Departments consider this act as one of the contributors in the increases in rates of accidents since it causes distractions on the passengers.

Therefore, the department also is worried of the trend putting in mind that many people have access to mobile phones. It is no doubt that this scenario presents an unquestionable issue in the fraternity of transportation. In order for drivers to use the phone, they are required to use their hands and eyes to do this.

This makes drivers lose concentration, as the control of vehicles may become a problem. Furthermore, the driver may be engrossed in the conversation based on its nature affecting his/her emotions leading to a loss of focus and control. For instance, drivers who engage in communication while driving may be angered or may receive sad information from the person they are communicating with which may anger or frustrate or excite them.

With such moods, the driver may lose his/her focus and concentration leading to an accident. Therefore, it is imperative that drivers be prohibited to use their cellular phones while driving. It should not be a matter of compromise but rather a practice worth avoiding if their safety as well as that of the passengers and other road users is to be achieved.

Furthermore, results from a study on drivers conducted in Perth, Australia in July 2005 by Insurance institute for highway safety indicated that use of cellular phones increases the chances of the occurrence of an accident by four times.

It further notes that use of hands free phones, or devices of such manner, does not improve the safety of driving (Young, and Schreiner 190). This assertion clearly demonstrates the dangers of driving while using cellular phones and therefore the need for its prohibition. There is no convincing reason that a driver who uses his/her cellular phone while driving is safe as it destructs attention.

We will write a custom Essay on Should drivers of automobiles be prohibited from using cellular phones? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These researches should be taken seriously if the rate of accidents and mischievous on our roads is to become outdated. People have continued to lose their lives due to the mistakes committed by drivers who are not concerned about other road users. The numbers of cellular phones are increasing in their use and as a remedy it is important for precautionary measures to be put in place to ensure that road accidents, caused by cellular phone distractions are contained.

In an argument for the prohibition of driver’s use of cellular, I do concur with the study conducted by the government of the US during June 2005, which showed that the use of these cellular phones was more likely to contribute or result in accidents as opposed to any other forms of distraction (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 8).

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Virginia tech transportation institute trailed 100 cars within duration of one year with their findings showing that those drivers using handsets and hand free car kits brought or caused more crashes as opposed to other forms of distractions.

This passes for an evidence of the consequences of what cellular phones can bring on the users of roads. It is therefore imperative that strict measures be improvised to ensure that there is no use of cellular phones among drivers of the automobiles.

Even though various researches have proved the distractions the use of cellular phones can have on the drivers and other road users, several parallel studies have been conducted with some refuting the positions. It may not be true per se, that the use of cellular phones causes the accidents. Various governments and legislations have not been put in place by various countries because they do not see this as a key cause of road carnages.

A study conducted by AAA Foundation for Traffic safety 2003 negated the previous researches by claiming that those drivers that use cellular phones while driving are more likely to reach their destinations safe as those who are distracted by other distractions were likely to cause accidents (Wilson, and Stimpson 2220). However, the report is so passive, as it does not see the need for prohibition of drivers’ use of cellular phones while driving.

They believe that cellular phones do not destruct the attention of drivers on their driving when compared to other distractions. This is a position that has also received support from those drivers or people or parties that are opposed to legislations which are intended to prohibit use of cellular phones while driving. However, as Collet points out, based on the results on the grounds, it appears null and void (23).

In conclusion, it is evident that the use of cellular phones among drivers of automobiles poses a danger not only to the driver, but also to the passengers as well as other road users. Though there are those who are opposed to this observation, the bottom line reveals most of the accidents as resulting form of the distraction subjected to drivers when conversing over the phone.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Should drivers of automobiles be prohibited from using cellular phones? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The debate has also resulted to the formulation of legislations concerning safety driving by prohibiting the use of cellular phones. Many governments have recognized it and always ensure that drivers do not risk by using their mobile telephones. To ensure that there is less distractions, states for instance Illinois have banned the use of text messages by drivers while driving, one example of the measures that have been taken to curb instances of accidents.

I also strongly second the prohibition of the use of phones by automobile drivers based on the tabled repercussions that have arisen as a result ranging from early deaths of innocent people as well as massive destruction of other people’s property. If all these result from phone misuse by drivers, why then allow them to use the phones while driving? Does it cost any thing to explain to your callers the risk they expose you to when they call you when driving?

Works Cited Collet, Guillo. Phoning while driving II: A review of driving conditions influence. Ergonomics 53.5 (2010): 602-616.

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. An Investigation of the Safety Implications of Wireless Communications in Vehicles. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2000.

University of South Carolina. Talking Distractions: Why Cell Phones and Driving Don’t Mix, 2008. Web.

Wilson, Fernando, and Stimpson, Jim. Trends in Fatalities from Distracted Driving in the United States, 1999 to 200.American Journal of Public Health 100 .11 (2010): 2213-2219.

Young, Richard, and Schreiner, Christopher. Real-World Personal Conversations Using a Hands-Free Embedded Wireless Device While Driving Effect on Airbag-Deployment Crash Rates. Risk Analysis: An International Journal, 29.2, (2009): 187-204.


Adidas and Marketing Communication Essay (Article) essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Direct marketing

Personal selling



Introduction Adi Dessler lived in Germany in the 1920s and he had passion of establishing and running an organization in the shoe industry. For more than 8 decades, Adidas Corporation built a brand name in the world of sports footwear, apparel and accessories. Adidas brand commands a large market share because of its technology and innovative design that ensures that the firm maintains a competitive advantage.

Advertising According to Allen (2008, p. 5), building a brand using advertising incorporates three concepts that are brand equity that indicates the perception of a brand in the market, brand awareness and brand association. Brand association relates the customers to the brand and its effects on customer needs.

Branding helps change the perception and expectations of a target market. Adidas uses covert advertising where Adidas products are introduced in entertainment or movie industries with a character wearing Adidas shoes being shown. Celebrities are used to advertise the product because of their fame, power and influence. For instance, David Beckman wearing Adidas sportswear while playing football has been used as an advertising tool by the firm (Allen, 2008).

In brand awareness, adidas uses sponsoring and endorsement. The firm works together with successful personalities in the sports industry such as Mohammed Ali and David Beckman as sports ambassadors for Adidas Corporation. TheCompany has also collaborated with NBA stars with their merger with the firm being called “Basketball is Brotherhood.” Six NBA stars were chosen to help children in realizing their dreams by training them.

In addition to the above strategies, the firm utilizes sponsorship to market its brand name. For instance, the company helps in sponsoring events and teams worldwide. It has participated in various events such as the 2008 Beijing Marathon, London Marathon and it is the official sportswear partner in the 2012 Olympics Games. It also sponsors teams by providing uniforms to clubs such as Real Madrid and AC Milan.

In today’s changing market, companies are moving from product-based marketing to customer-oriented approach. Consumers taste and preferences are the focal point in marketing. Adidas is geared towards producing products that are tailor made with many benefits such as shoes that fit well, durable and strong.

Direct marketing In today’s changing market, Adidas is moving from product-based marketing to consumer-oriented approach. Allen (2008, p, 6) argues that direct marketing involves various strategies that a company uses to communicate directly with the clients. Adidas has moved towards digital printing in the media by using consumer catalogs with visual images. Transmission and using images helps the clients to feel the quality of the products. Adidas is using tele-marketing strategies by creating a heavy media presence through print media.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The use of various sports magazines, ESPN magazines, show casing company products and TV campaigns make the firm take the first place in athletic games in session. Billboards of the company products have been spotted on various streets with enhancement of the visual element. Moreover, the firm uses the internet, sports social sites and by mailing directly to the clients informing them of the new products as other methods of marketing its products (Allen, 2008).

Personal selling It is whereby sales agents are involved in selling the product directly to the customer. Hollenbeck (2007, p. 81) believes the art of photography is quality design can help sales agents convince customers easily hence being able to increase the sales revenue of the firm. The good brand name of Adidas has been earned using personal selling representatives of the company that sell the high quality products to the clients of the firm.

They therefore establish personal relationships with the clients that are vital for the creation and increase of the market share. Moreover, personal selling has affected the reputation of the company positively because individual consumers perceive the company positively. Packaging plays an important role in consumer purchasing decisions. It reflects the quality of the product, acts as a sales agent and advertising

Conclusion In conclusion, consumers are important to an organization and Adidas Corporation has ensured that it achieves consumer satisfaction and loyalty. By producing high quality products, the firm ensures that it maintains the market share while maximizing profits. To market the product, the firm uses various strategies such as campaigns, personal selling, advertisements and use of goodwill ambassadors. All these marketing strategies have maintained communication between the firm and the customers.

References Allen, C. (2008) Advertising and integrated brand promotion. New York: Cengage Learning.

Hollenbeck, C. (2007) Big Bucks Selling your Photography. New York: Amherst Media Inc.


Sammy’s Heroism in “A essay help

Even though the story is just a few pages long and focuses on the narrator’s description of the three girls, it is long enough to fully uncover the character of Sammy, the narrator. The story is told in first person narration and unfolds in a supermarket. Throughout the short story, the readers see Sammy grow from an immature boy to a fully matured man who is able to take, stand by, face and accept the consequences of his own actions, which initially seem thoughtless.

At the beginning of the story, Sammy seems like a thoughtless sexist who only admires girls because he has nothing to do , but as the story develops the readers is able to see beyond Sammy’s obsession and objectification of the three girls. The reader sees beyond Sammy’s seemingly thoughtless actions and sees the logical reason for his rebellion. Sammy is therefore the unrecognised hero in this story.

At the initial stages of the story Sammy’s heroism is so much concealed that it can be taken as youthful ignorance, combined with teenage truancy. This is reflected in his cynical attitudes towards everything that he sees including the customers who come to A


Analyzing the Washington Cathedral Classical Music Christmas Concert at the Washington National Cathedral Term Paper college essay help: college essay help

The Washington Cathedral Classical Music Christmas Concert discussed in this paper witnessed the performance of a number of pieces, including Handel’s “Messiah”, John Francis Wade’s “O come o ye faithful”, Philip Brooks’ “Little town of Bethlehem”, and Franz Xaver’s “Silent Night”, as performed by the Washington National Cathedral Choir together with the Baroque Orchestra.

Conducted by the cathedral’s music director, Michael McCarthy, the two-day concert took place in December 3-4 2010, at the Washington National Cathedral. Given that the concert was in December during the early Christmas season, the compositions performed were geared towards ushering in the mood of Christmas, and I feel that the Washington National Cathedral Choir, together with the Baroque Orchestra, achieved this aim.

The pieces were performed beautifully; actually, I got a sense of satisfaction and deep rumination of the Christmas season because of the expressive execution of the pieces by the band and the choir. The conductor ensured that after the performance of each piece, a suitable break occurred whereby the viewers and the concertgoers could take time to “take in” the previous piece’s performance.

However, I found it a little unfortunate that no illustrations of the wordings (text) of the various pieces performed accompanied the performances of the pieces, and I felt that such an addition would have enhanced the performances.

In such concerts, there are many viewers who cannot recall the wordings of all these Christmas songs or know the wordings altogether, though they may be familiar with the tunes and melodies. Therefore, a projection of the texts of the compositions on the many screens available in the concert hall would have enhanced the experience of many viewers, including myself.

One of the aspects of the music concert that appealed to me was the harmonious performance between the band and the choir. Many times the choir would sing some compositions alone without instrumentation by the orchestra band, while on another occasion the band would exclusively play the instruments with the choir remaining silent, before they joined their voices and instruments during a climactic part of a composition – chorus – to create beautiful harmony. What a beautiful soul moving performance.

The band made extensive use of the violin in the instrumentation, an aspect I found quite soothing and relaxing. The band used the violin to complement the singing of the choir, or to accompany a soloist performance in various aspects of the compositions. For instance, during the performance of Handel’s “Messiah”, the slow and ‘inviting’ strokes of the violin by the band introduced the soprano soloist before she began to sing, creating an effective stage for her singing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, I feel that the performers did a good job overall. The Washington National Cathedral Choir, together with the Baroque Orchestra, made the concert a worthwhile treat, and I personally felt a sense of fulfillment from watching the concert. The Washington National Cathedral itself served as an appropriate venue and I felt the cathedral’s massive hall enhanced the performance of the band and the orchestra.

As aforementioned, one of the performed pieces was “Messiah”, composed by George Handel. Handel’s piece, “Messiah”, was composed in the year 1741 (Vroon and Barker 54). “Messiah” is composed of three parts whereby, each part underscores the story of Christ, from his prophesied coming, his acts while on earth, and his eventual victory over death. The “Messiah” was one of the pieces in the concert that I found to be most captivating.

The piece begins with the slow and rhythmic introduction by the Baroque orchestra band, without any voices from the Washington Cathedral Choir. The Baroque orchestra band utilizes violins in the opening stages of the piece, an introduction that sets the stage for a female soloist. The soloist then sings her heart out with a slight accompaniment of the violin by the band, as she recites the story of Jesus Christ, the basis on which the entire “Messiah” composition lays.

The soloist’s introductory performance borders on a recitation or narrative, and such compositions are known as oratorios, as “Messiah” by Handel is. There are several aspects of “Messiah” that I found to be fascinating. For instance, the band and the choir in this composition worked together to effectively tell the story of Christ. The band would play slow tunes when the text of the song was sad and lively tunes when the choir was singing about a lively aspect of the life of Jesus Christ.

This pattern of tying the instrumentation to the message enabled the viewers and concertgoers to adopt the various moods and tones evoked by this composition effectively. For instance, in the choir’s rendition of Section I recitative “Darkness shall cover the earth”, the general tone of the choir creates a mood that evokes sadness and the viewer gets engrossed in this mood for a moment.

“Messiah” has diverse variations and there are sections in the piece when the intensity of the singing rises to very high climactic heights before again slowing down to a stable melody and rhythm. The listener is thus able to listen to the song and experience the different moods even before the specific words and phrases get pronounced and in my opinion, I hold that concertgoers should be treated to such experiences; its worth one’s time, energy, and resources.

The polyphonic nature of the musical texture of “Messiah” derives from the fact that the orchestra band combines with the choir to perform this oratorio. Effectively, the different instrumentation and the singing produce a polyphonic texture, which can be quite intense sometimes, especially in the choruses and the intense repetitive rendition of the chorus “Amen”.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Analyzing the Washington Cathedral Classical Music Christmas Concert at the Washington National Cathedral specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Oratorios generally tell stories, and “Messiah’ is no exception (Barker 62). The fact that “Messiah” is composed of three parts gives the piece a distinct form and a repetitive rhythm (Davies 466). Because this particular oratorio has a narrative aspect to it, there is a specific rhythm and form present.

These parts all begin with recitations that lead to choruses, which are the climax. Each section has its distinctive function; for instance, section I prophesies of the coming Messiah. Section II tells of the Messiah’s acts and his glorious earthly existence, while section three tells of his triumph over death. All these sections create a particular form and rhythm throughout the Oratorio.

In conclusion, the concert at the Washington National Cathedral was a revelation of the supreme and relaxing nature of classical music. Even though I may have heard some of the pieces in folk form before, the classical rendition by the Washington Cathedral National Choir and the Baroque Band gave the songs a new aspect. This concert, so far, is the best concert that I have ever attended in my life.

Works Cited Barker, John. “Overview: operas and oratorios.” American Record Guide 66.1 (2003): 62-64.

Davies, Andrew. “Oratorio as Exegesis: The Use of the Book of Isaiah in Handel’s Messiah.” Biblical Interpretation 15.4/5 (2007): 464-484.

Vroon, Donald, and John Barker. “Overview: Handel’s Instrumental Music


Advocacy Activities Essay essay help online

Introduction Advocacy refers to actions that articulate in favor of, advocate, contend for a cause, and implore on behalf of others. It is a continuous process whose objective is changing outlooks, actions, principles and laws. This is done by impacting people and corporations with power, procedures and frameworks at distinct levels for the improvement of people affected matters of poverty. Advocacy activities entail a current, actual action on the part of vigorous, nonprofit groups’ worldwide.

It is used to achieve sustainable transformation. It is also used to eliminate structural sources of poverty so as to promote larger parts of the society through program pursuits. Advocacy actions are based on reinforcing and empowering unfortunate and marginalized associations or persons. Advocacy work trains communities via shared encounters, examples learnt and illustrates what actions function best. This enables the community members to carry out fantastic developmental activities in their society (Strolovitch 322).

Discussion An advocacy activity that will be discussed in my situation is based on a program on the radio and television. This advocacy activity is aimed at reinforcing the comprehension of and concentration given to justifications and obligations associated with HIV/AIDS. It offers a forum for supporters and policy makers to engage into conversations and debate present issues in the community.

To ensure that the community has participated in advocacy programme, they should be educated about this program, analyze their missions and objectives and then collaborate with the society.

All parties entailed in this collaboration should be prepared to carry out movements and fight for change. The structure for the HIV/AIDS advocacy strategy will entail eight vital elements. This include clearly stated issues, well planned objectives, well assessed environment, recognized stakeholders, key messages, well chosen approaches and tools, execution plan and indicators for supervision and assessment (Ross 60).

Formulation of objectives

During this step, the objectives together with the expected outcomes will be defined. The advocacy objective, in this situation, is to decrease the spread of AIDS and encourage those already affected to lead a positive life. It is required that this objective states what exactly is to be changed and after how long this will be achieved.

It should define whether the society needs extra resources and whether they want to develop or change a principle. The objective and its remedy should not be so wide or remote that the partners are likely to become devastated. Persons and associations are likely to join an advocacy programme if they see a high probability of success in this programme.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is beneficial to be always aware of persons and organizations that are likely to strengthen your objective. For instance, in the HIV programme, those already affected and relatives of the victims are more likely to give support. Potential hostility to the advocacy programme efforts should also be put into consideration.

The objective should be stated in quantifiable terms and within an anticipated limit. A good objective of an advocacy strategy should be smart. This means that it should be precise, measurable, oriented on action, reasonable and time bound. Following formulation, the objective should be analyzed based on how it satisfies a given criterion (Strolovitch 322).

Channels and Tools for Reaching the Audience

The channels and tools, which will be, used for the intended audience in this HIV Programme include stakeholder evaluation, persuasion practices and media. Persuasion tools will involve urging, petitioning, discussions, conciliations and conflict resolutions among the people.

The use of media as a tool will involve the use of press meetings, fact and background slips, media packets and radio and television shows. Stakeholder evaluation as a tool will involve the identification and categorization of the potential stakeholders. This will be done so as to know the peoples interests based on the HIV issue (Lubet 415).

Results that should be expected as evidence of success

In this HIV program, certain results are expected as measures of success. The percentage of total health financial plan allocated to HIV/AIDS is the first indicator. This designates the victory of advocacy in securing finances for executing the HIV programme. Another indicator is the percentage contribution of the authority, the private sector and society in the HIV programme.

This designates success of advocacy in acquiring national dedication to addressing HIV issues. Contribution of the sector of health budget to be paid for the HIV/AIDS programme is the last indicator. This designates the significance attached to the enhancement of behavior change for health amongst the public (Selby 302).

Advocacy M


This class is U.S.History I need to answer 2 questions with 250 word each in my own words from online essay help

This class is U.S.History I need to answer 2 questions with 250 word each in my own words from chapter 4. Each question needs to have at least 1 cite in APA format.
Attached is chapter 4.

1. What impact did the Stono rebellion have on slaves?

2. How did the French and Indian war change and impact at the colonies? Who were the victims?


The “Success” Term Concept Essay (Critical Writing) college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Definition and concepts It is a commonly experienced phenomenon that people have objectives to attain in life. Social structures, for example, drive the desire among individuals in lower classes to break through to better living standards as per what they admire. This leads to individuals adopting strategies and approaches that can help them in changing their status. Thoughts or dreams are not however just realized and even after some people making steps towards achieving their objectives they never manage to have positive results.

The outcome of every single initiative is normally identified with success or failure. The term success has been offered a variety of definitions and approached differently depending on societies, and individuals. It has for example been defined in terms of monetary possession with rich individuals being considered successful. Establishment and maintenance of a healthy family in social terms has also been used in societies to define success.

According to Schwaiger, the definition of success varies depending on an individual’s society and the social value that the individual upholds. One of the formal definitions of success however gives it the property of attaining a subject that an individual has desired. This gives success a diverse meaning that starts from small things that an individual may achieve out of sight of any third party. My personal perception of success is in line with this definition to mean any attainment of a predetermined goal by an individual (Swaiger 53).

Based on these definitions of success and my perception towards the subject together with my past life experience, a successful person is that individual who identifies an objective and works to its successful accomplishment. The achievement might not necessarily be a magnificent one that attracts public attention.

A student who has been poorly performing in class, sets his goal at improving by five percent in a next undertaken exam would for example be successful if he attain the five percent increment. My consideration of success to include intent is because some people can find themselves in a better position without necessarily working towards the attainment. This defines luck rather than success.

Key Determinants to Success

From the definition of success that gives it the property of set objectives that are then to be pursued by an individual to attainment lays the ground to the factors that affect it. The basis of success that established the goal to be pursued is for example a point to its factor.

In the laying out of the goals, an individual is normally faced with fears over the possibility of positive results as a result of the initiative to be undertaken. There are also always a variety of other options that an individual can pursue with fears of loosing better opportunities following the adoption of a given option. Being daring with respect to risk taking is therefore a determinant of success.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Without the courage to make choices, an individual will not even be able to establish a goal to pursue. Once a goal has been identified, plan for adopting an approach into realizing the objective becomes a necessity. An individual must at this moment have the capacity to creatively identify ways through which the goal can be best realized. The capacity to develop plans and strategies for implementation thus becomes the next determinant of success.

An individual who has a dream but can not figure out how such a dream can be realized whether directly or through other people will most likely stagnate with the dream at its initial stage. With an identified plan and consideration that there are always challenges to every initiative, persistence of a person plays another role in determining the success of the individual.

Persistence involves the will to move on even in threats of failure to attain the planned goals. Hard work is another determinant in attaining success of individuals. Hard work that starts from the initial stages of an activity up to its ultimate accomplishment thus forms the basis of determinants to success (Dalton and Alger 270).

A third party’s Perception of Success

One of the parties that I have considered to be successful around me is my parents. An interaction with them throughout my life has offered me an understanding of their perception and understanding of what success is all about.

According to my parents and as I was driven by my mother, success means the accomplishment of a dream that one has. With this consideration of meaning of success, their definition of success is similar to mine in the sense that success involves the identification of a goal which in their view is the dream that an individual may have.

My parents have considerably been successful with respect to their dream that they accomplished. Their success was attained through persistence that finally enabled them to identify the tool to their success and how to acquire that tool. Though they finally attained their dream, they were occasionally faced with setbacks in the process.

Their dream being financial stability when they had no adequate education saw them struggle to get jobs which they occasionally lost till my mother got a job in a shop that established her as a business person. Poverty and being over ambitious were their major challenges (Dalton and Alger 270).

We will write a custom Critical Writing on The “Success” Term Concept specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Comparison of Ideas

The writers had a variety of opinion about success. According to Dalton and Alger, there are a variety of uncontrollable forces that affect success of an individual. Discrimination for instance was identified by the authors as a factor towards success. Barriers between social classes also play a role to the success of an individual.

These ideas compares with mine on the basis that it is not very easy to break barriers into success. This for example explains the rigidity as realized in social classes that are very difficult to cross. Success thus depends on a variety of factors other than those controllable by individuals (Dalton and Alger 270).

Personal Hope to Success

As an individual, I have resorted to adopt a stepwise approach in pursuing my objectives to my ultimate success. My goals in life include my academic success in the short run and economic stability that can adequately support my family back at home. Obstacles that I have realized over my success include language barrier together with unstable economic background that has forced me to work as I study. My plan for success is basically based on perseverance and hard work to attain my goals.

Oppressions to success

Oppression, realized in any form negatively affects people’s capacity to succeed. Taking forms such as segregation, cultural difference and even self concealment, oppression directly affects the capacity to succeed by limiting resources (Richard 3).

Works Cited Dalton, Cruz and Alger, Horato. From Ragged Dick. New York, NY: Taylor


What Special Responsibilities do Computer Professionals Have with Respect to Understanding and Protecting the Privacy Rights of their Fellow Citizens? Essay essay help online free

Privacy ranks as among the very important factors that many computer users consider when making the decisions about how to approach the concept of information technology.

In the present day, there are many who have built lucrative businesses out of collecting data about computer users and some organizations even finance their activities mainly through selling marketing data or even selling lists with the names and details of potential customers. From an interpersonal perspective, some individuals even utilize internet-based services to spy on personal backgrounds of other individuals.

A common example of this is the use of search engines by employers to look into information about employees and potential employees over the internet. Criminals also use the internet to search for personal details which they then use for identity theft. It is because of such security concerns that computer professionals have special responsibilities in relation to understanding, respecting and protecting the privacy rights of other computer users and this essay shall explore these.

Given that internet use is an international phenomenon, it is impossible for computer professionals and policy makers to control all the content of the data that is transferred online.

Be that as it may, computer professionals still have some responsibility of protecting the rights of fellow citizens one of which is to come up with mechanisms to protect copyright and intellectual property rights. The main aim of copyright is not only to prevent illegal copying of information, including the information stored in digital format which can be copied, altered and transmitted through electronic networks with relative ease (Lopez, 1998).

The practical challenges that owners of digital data face are very important for governments trying to apply or extend existing copyright laws to digital means. It is the responsibility of computer professionals to push the authorities to enforce laws that protect intellectual properties. At an international level, it is the responsibility of computer professionals to contribute to the efforts of bodies such as the World intellectual property organization (WIPO) towards the facilitation of the protection of property rights.

As noted by Welfens (2002), the internet has greatly contributed to expanding individuals’ learning horizons but the ease with which information has become accessible is raising concerns among citizens in relation to the exposure to offensive material. Parents and educators have also raised concerns about the negative influence that the internet is having on young minds.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a way of addressing these concerns, computer professionals have contributed to the formation of civil liberty organizations such as the Electronic Frontier Foundation (EFF) and the Computer Professionals for Social Responsibility (CPSR) which supports legal and legislative towards the protection of user’s civil liberties and protects the privacy and civil liberties of online users, respectively (Dhillon, 2003).

Computer professionals can also help computer users protect their privacy while using the internet by recommending a few measures that they (users) could apply while using their computers. One such measure would be to disable cache and history functions in individual computers whenever the can. This will prevent a malicious individual from using this information track the sites that the user have visited.

The computer professionals could also advise users not to release their personal identification information to anyone else as this information could be used against them. The number of computer users is increasing by the day but not all users have the knowledge of how to protect their privacy while using the internet. It is therefore the responsibility of computer professionals to take all the necessary steps that would help preserve the privacy of computer users, some of which have been mentioned in this essay.

References Dhillon, G. (2003). Social Responsibility in the Information Age: Issues and Controversies. Hershey, PA: Idea Group Inc.

Lopez, X.R. (1998). The dissemination of spatial data: a North American-European comparative study on the impact of government information policy. Greenwich, CT: Ablex Publishing Corporation.

Welfens, P.J.J. (2002). Internet economics dot net. New York, NY: Springer.


Pros and Cons of the Affirmative Action for Minorities in the US Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Bush Janine defines affirmative action as “public or private program designed to equalize hiring and admissions opportunities for historically disadvantaged groups by taking into consideration those very characteristics which have been used to deny them equal treatment” (115). There are ongoing debates on the legality of preferential treatment of minority groups living in the United States. Some ethical arguments posit that affirmative action plans are just while others contradict this viewpoint.

Ethical Argument in favor of Affirmative Action Policies Affirmative action policies can be justified on the basis of three main types of ethical theories: Justice; democracy; and social utility. Beauchamp and Bowie present an argument in favor of affirmative action. According to them, minority groups have experienced prolonged periods of injustice; hence they play a very limited role in social and economic activities in the US (325).

Thus, affirmative action policies in university admissions and employment are part of the reward for past injustice against the minority groups for slavery and other forms of prejudice. Democracy is also used to justify affirmative action in the US. Post argues that the promotion of democratic system in the society justifies affirmative action policies in universities’ admissions (23).

He argues further that the universities “aspire to cultivate the remarkable and difficult capacity to regard oneself from the perspective of the other” (Post 23). Thus, affirmative action allows a learning institution to admit the best students from the White and Colored population (Issacharoff 675).

With respect to social utility, Dworkin presents a modern argument as a justification for affirmative action policies (2). He suggests that the aim of the affirmative action policies are to rectify “the current prejudice against minority groups in the US by promoting parity and the tenets of utilitarian ethics” (Dworkin 4). Anderson also states that the racial assimilation of mainstream institutions is critical to alleviate the current chauvinism against the minority in the US (1196).

Ethical Argument against Affirmative Action Policies There are a number of authors who censured the affirmative action strategies on basis of the utilitarian ethical premise. One of the main reason suggested by Shaw and Barry is that affirmative policy contravenes the rights of the Whites as they are punished by a social policy that seek to rectify “past prejudices done by their forebears” (23).

Sowell argued that affirmative action might suggest that the minority groups are incompetent and thus unproductive (3). This implies that they don’t deserve to be admitted to the university or be offered an employment opportunity on the basis of their skills and personal effort. Loury opposes the suggestion that the minorities be given preferential treatment on the basis of the enormous income gap between the Whites and the non Whites US citizens (5).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He states further that, “Another reason for being skeptical about the practice of affirmative action is that it can undercut the incentives for blacks to develop their competitive abilities” (Loury 6). The minority groups in the US generally discriminated with respect to employment opportunities (Alba 544).

However, Arnold argues against affirmative action policies that seek to ensure that blacks are not discriminated in the labor market (7). His argument is based on the fact that the minorities harmed by past prejudices are dead thus they can’t be compensated. He also states that incidences of racial bias in the US are minor and manageable (Arnold 7). Finally, Soni states that affirmative action makes minority workers incompetent since they are employed and promoted for posts which they are unqualified (578).

Works Cited Alba, Richard, and Logan, John. How Segregated Are Middle-Class African Americans? Social Problems 47.4(2000): 543-558.

Anderson, Elizabeth. Integration, Affirmative Action, and Strict Scrutiny. NYU Law Review 77(2002): 1195-1271.

Arnold, Denis. Affirmative action and the demands of justice. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1998. Print

Beauchamp, Tom.


Case Analysis (BCC) Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

The problem

The cause of the problem

How the problem should be solved

Leadership in solving the problem

Knowledge that the problem has been fixed

My Perspective

Works Cited

Introduction BCC is an example of an organization that is discriminative in its policies. Many organizations in the globe are embracing the non-discrimination agenda, at least at face value. They no longer pay women less than they do to men for the same jobs, or blatantly deny women promotions, awarding them instead to less qualified males.

Nowadays, gender discrimination at the workplace has taken a completely new approach. BCC’s policy of not promoting administration staff to leadership positions and not screening candidates who majored in liberal arts is just an example of how some modern organizations practice discrimination within their ranks.

The problem In BCC’s case, the problem is obvious; women are not viewed as ‘leadership material’, or even ‘technically capable’. These come in as stereotypes that have been attached to women since time immemorial and ones, which continue to linger in our societies. For this reason, they influence the way workplace norms are formulated, which is often in a masculine culture. The root of the problem in BCC’s instance is bigger than meets the eye.

BCC harbors very traditional views on the role of women, as most of the seasoned employees and leaders agree, and this current change is just in reaction to a lawsuit, not an inherent need to correct a history of wrong practices. Consequently, the law officers will be appeased by the superficial measures put up by the organization to avoid sanctions, but the women leaders and technical employees will never be fully accepted while the leaders have such a chauvinistic mindset.

The cause of the problem It is not the leaders’ or the seasoned employees’ fault that they do not believe women should assume leadership roles. In fact, the organization’s ‘founding fathers’ are to blame. They created the foundation of the organization on a masculine stereotype of male superiority, and this has been passed down through generations. Moreover, the society fortifies these stereotypes by expressing the qualities a leader should posses to be of an ‘agentic’ nature.

That is assertive, strict, aggressive, and decisive. Women on the other hand are presumed to have ‘communal’ natures: empathetic, emotional, nice, and compassionate. According to society, such traits can never yield results for a company, especially now that competition is at its peak. Therefore, because of the regulatory pressures exerted on them, BCC is the case in point; firms fit women into the masculine fabric of the organization in a bid to appear as if they have a status quo.

The company’s practices are still masculine specific, the expectations of performance, the way of doing things, and all the fundamentals favor men because they were put in place with men in mind. Consequently, incorporating women without changing these fundamental natures of an organization’s culture is not going to yield permanent results. Instead, the next problem BCC will be warding off will be that of unsatisfied female executives.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More How the problem should be solved First, it is important to note that BCC is indeed in the wrong. Its policies are disparately discriminative and so we will be found liable for discrimination.

At this point, our best options lie with correcting the oppressive policies and massaging the egos of the women group that is suing the corporation. This will involve doing whatever it takes, including promoting long-serving women to managerial positions, as soon as possible, so that a perusal of the organization’s promotion strategy by the court will indicate corrective measures seeking to end discrimination.

In the end, new policies that are promotion-friendly for women will have to be adopted; these include creation and support of mentoring relationships, installation of an Integrated Career Management and Assessment System, and following of the consequent court orders, which may include the implementation of a Quota-system during hiring.

With this goal of righting past wrongs in mind, my first course of action would be to integrate the hiring of Liberal Arts graduates into the recruitment criteria, while so doing preference will be given to female applicants when qualifications are parallel across the board.

While at it, I will encourage longer screening sessions for these female interviewees because research has proved that male interviewers take longer to bond with female interviewees than with their male counterparts. Therefore, for a fair assessment of their profitability, I will either accord them more time if the interviewee is male or appoint female interviewers to handle this project.

This will be followed by consequent integration of the trainees into the management-training course. I will also consider seasoned female employees who qualify for this training course and present them with the opportunity to participate in it for advancement in their respective career paths.

While on this errand, I will be sure to address the causes of previous discriminatory actions against women instead of just treating the symptoms. That means, I will include the three most common approaches most firms use to flatten the playing field for both men, and women, but in addition to this, I will also engage the research team on studies into how to do so effectively.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Case Analysis (BCC) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The three approaches include assimilation-where women are taught how to adopt male attributes that do not come naturally to them. Male colleagues teach them tricks of the game. However, the shortcoming of this approach is in the exclusion of informal avenues, which are the real sources of information, resources and tips of how to succeed, yet few women can access these.

Secondly, I will use accommodation, where women are taken in with all their qualities, unique needs and situations. This will involve allocation of special policies and benefits such as addition of tenure time, and new career tracks specially defined to accommodate maternity leave. Finally, I will encourage the organization to maximize on the qualities women bring with them. They can be used to market our products to the female public. They are also good at manipulation and so can be used at negotiations.

With these ideas in mind, I will counter the problem of policy limitations, which hinder clerical staff from attaining managerial status. Whereas it may not be practical to promote senior secretaries to technical managerial positions, it would be much easier to create managerial positions with the equivalent pay as a similar job in other departments.

That would cater for the seasoned clerical staff that may not be in a position to learn further and advance in the normal way into the technical department. However, I will also simultaneously break the boundaries that prevent advancement of clerical staff into operational, maintenance and technical areas. This type of change necessitates a more advanced training department that can equip “on the job” employees with the relevant skills necessary for complex roles within the organization.

Although at first this may appear burdensome, in the end it will prove profitable to the organization because the talent will be in-built and loyal. In the same vein, the requirements for in-house employees’ advancement within the organization will be cut down. For instance, instead of a BA Degree, I will suggest that a diploma gained after several training quarters should suffice, the ten years of experience can also be done away with, and instead a probation period while on the job introduced, with a maximum of 6 months.

It is important to note that these changes would only apply to BCC employees seeking advancement from within the corporation, and even them I would limit by requiring that they be employed for at least one and a half years before seeking such promotion. Within the training department itself, I will introduce mentorship relationships. These are collaborated liaisons between upcoming employees and those in senior management (Baker 400).

Leadership in solving the problem I will require the backing of the CEO on this. I will also require the help of managers, and departmental heads in the adoption of our new policies. However, the most cooperation will be expected of the Human Resource Department, the Public Relations Department, and their heads.

The conservative nature of BCC may prove difficult at first in the adoption of such a policy because it most current managers are male, while the upcoming employees are female. However, research has proved that even so, these relationships can work if certain measures are taken including: communication of the relationships and their effectiveness to all the staff, and regular monitoring, and assessment of these relationships.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Case Analysis (BCC) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In addition to mentoring relationships, I will prepare training that will teach the senior management the importance of applying personnel policies equally to all employees, providing candid appraisals of performance to all employees, assuming that all employees desire to be promoted, effecting equal training and counseling opportunities to all employees (Baker 404). This should help tackle the issue of preventing unmarried employees from travelling together.

Finally, there is need for an open-door-policy, which will serve to open up communication policies between employees and the management. Consequently, similar legal crises shall not arise in future because of the existence of a cordial relationship whereby employees address their issues to the management first. There is always the possibility that my colleagues in senior management who have a problem with women holding managerial position could oppose this idea of promoting female employees.

In that case, I see no alternative but to make quotas effective during hiring, which the law will do anyway if BCC does not correct its mistakes. Quotas mean that before hiring new staff, the organization will examine its current staffing, then draw an assessment of the number of female employees that would currently be part of that staff had it observed the demands of affirmative action from the word go. It will then hire to attain this figure of balance.

Knowledge that the problem has been fixed I do not expect a ‘quick fix’. Change of such magnitude must take some time before it stops being mechanical and starts being genuinely part of an organization’s culture. However, some of the short-term signs that the problem is solved include better productivity of both male and female employees, healthy competition, reduced lawsuits and negative publicity.

Low turnover rates, more applications by women for positions in the organization, public recognition of neutrality of the organization, loyalty among staff to the organization, and a happy working environment for all among others come in as other signs.

My Perspective My perspective on this matter is that, it is the high time for the BCC to tow the line over discriminative policies. The affirmative action has been in pace for over five decades now yet the seasoned personnel are still holding on to their conservative and chauvinistic values. Although it was not the ideal trigger, this lawsuit is a wake-up-call for BCC and any other organization that still discriminates against women or other minorities, whether disparately or facially.

Works Cited Baker, McKenzie. Worldwide Guide to Termination, Employment Discrimination, and

Workplace Harrassment Laws. Oxford: Oxford Up, 2009.


What a manager should know about motivation Essay writing essay help

Motivation of the employees is essential for the organization’s survival. With this in mind, there is need to put in place effective measures to foster motivation. Employees can list various reasons for their discontent at the job place: insufficient incomes, restrictive regulations or inflexible policies are just a few of the causes of discontent. However, setting out to fix these deficiencies in a bid to motivate the staff will yield negative, even detrimental results. This is because lack of motivation is an intrinsic quality.

To understand this statement better, I will adopt Ray B. Williams’ definition of motivation: a predisposition to behave purposefully to acquire the will to achieve, achieve unmet goals, and that force that pushes a person to strive for the accomplishment of both personal and organizational goals. From the definition, it becomes clear that financial compensation is never sufficient for the motivation of an individual.

Other factors such as challenging, interesting tasks and more responsibility are better placed to counter this problem. An inherent quality can only be cultivated through several well-researched processes, and over a period. Moreover, the manager has little choice if any but to comply as failure to do so will result in poor results in the organization or loss of employees for more interesting opportunities way, the manager loses.

A lot of research has been conducted on the topic of motivation. It is important to note here that what applies to employees will most likely apply to consumers as well, “Companies also survey their front-line employees for their attitudes as well as for their ideas for improved service, asking their employees to take the customer’s perspective” (Plunket, Attner, and Allen 35). Neuroscientific findings have the most authority, which suggest four basic needs that influence motivation.

First, the need of driving to acquire, which involves minimal material elements that are necessary for a good life including financial compensation. Managers can modify their policies by adopting reward systems that are based on performance to satisfy this need. Secondly, the Drive to bond discusses about the humans need to constantly build relationships of love, caring and in which they can feel like they belong.

Managers can satisfy this need by introducing collaborative strategies at the work place such as teamwork and mutual work policies. Thirdly, the driving to comprehend points out the yearning for learning as well as the understanding of the complexities of life where managers can increase specificity of job definitions in a manner that will make employees feel as if they are contributing to the organization’s growth.

They can also install learning policies that are aimed at building on the employees’ current repertoire of knowledge. Drive to defend urges to protect what belongs to us: property, accomplishments, and ourselves. In such a case, the management can build trust with the employees by reinstating the firm’s integrity through transparency and fairness.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More All these drives seem to echo what psychologists have already said including Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs which lists, love, security, self actualization, and self transcendence as forces that direct human behavior. To coordinate the employees’ performance, a manager needs to be wise about it.

It is interesting to note that while these drives seem to be aimed at individual development of the staff members, it is only after an individual has accomplished inner stability that they can begin to transfer their efforts for the betterment of the organization. There is no other way, “control and command” or “carrot and stick” techniques are no longer effective, and in fact, they never have been. Finally, it is also important to apply these motivational techniques to consumers.

Effective managers should know their consumers expectations and anticipate their needs right from production as well as “…trying to anticipate the needs and problems of customers and to set realistic expectations through customer education and communication strategies” (Plunket, Attner, and Allen 23). Today’s multiplicity of opportunities makes the need for organization-based motivation even greater to guarantee retention and success. Emotions inform decision-making. They are the keys to successful motivation.

Work Cited Plunket, Warren, Attner, Raymond, and Allen, Gemmy. Management, Meeting and

Exceeding Customer Expectations. Ninth Edition. Chicago: South-western, 2008.


Memory Process Paper Essay essay help online: essay help online

Introduction From a psychological point of view, the human memory may be said to be the capability on one to store a piece of information and retain or recall it as of when appropriate. The study of this very important phenomenal started with philosophers’ investigation of such possibilities as an artificial enhancement of the memory. Over the years, particularly by the end of the 19th and the beginning of the 20th century, there was a lot already done by scholars particularly in the area of cognitive psychology’s paradigm.

Knowledge of memory has developed so rapidly of late so that it is the fundamental pillar of cognitive neurosciences. With the rapid development of cognitive psychology, there are several alternatives to testing of one’s brain. These include testing for audio receptivity or for image receptivity, or for both. This paper is a report of a test of memory for visual receptivity and retentiveness through a conceptual model that was designed to help retain pictured images.

The Concepts of Working Memory, Short-term Memory, and Long-term Memory For one to articulately understand the concepts of working-memory, short-term-memory, and long-term-memory in present days, he or she has to streamline the three memory types to specifics of what constitutes or makes a difference or similarity in working-memory, short-term-memory, and long-term-memory (Schacter, 1996). This, of course, is because there are numerous confusing arguments regarding the three from different scholars.

From a general point of consideration, however, short-term memory constitutes 2 distinct properties including a demonstration of chunk-capacity limits, and the ability to decay temporarily. There is equally a significant controversy on the differences between these 2 properties (Schacter, 1996).

One’s understanding of the concept of working memory is therefore build around 3 slight discrepancies. These discrepancies, according to Atkinson


Anxiety and Its Types Essay best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Anxiety Disorders

Vulnerability to Developing Anxiety Disorders

Economic Conditions

Working Conditions

Living Environments

Biological Predisposition


Works Cited

Introduction Anxiety is generally described as a psychological condition which brings about distinct detrimental physiological responses which is caused as result of various external stimuli in the form of stressors which destabilize a person’s normal mental state.

In other words it is a condition with physical, mental, emotional, behavioral and cognitive effects brought by a variety of external events or factors which have a detrimental effect on a person’s well being (Alnæs, 409 – 412). What must be understood is that most individuals feel varying types of anxiety over the course of their life.

It is a natural response to tense, stressful or otherwise difficult situations which helps an individual concentrate more, develop a clearer picture of a situation and overall enables them to perform better than they otherwise would have. It is characterized by elevated blood pressure, shortness of breath, feelings of nervousness, restlessness and repetitive thoughts regarding particular actions.

When examining relevant literature on the topic it can be seen that most experts agree that anxiety responses evolved as a method of coping with unavoidable or inevitable situations wherein a greater degree of concentration, motivation as well as focus was needed in order to overcome the inevitable event or situation (Alnæs, 409 – 412).

What must be understood is that developing a certain case of anxiety after a particular event or problem is completely normal and within the bounds of average human behavior, what is abnormal though is if a person develops prolonged symptoms of anxiety which prevent them from functioning normally as a direct result of psychological stressors which manifests in distinct aberrant forms of emotional outbursts, behavioral responses or physical actions which are far from what can be considered normal behavior.

Anxiety Disorders It must be noted that while anxiety is a common human attribute, anxiety disorders are not and are characterized by their debilitating physiological and psychological effects which hinder an individual’s ability to function normally. The five main types of anxiety disorders are classified as follows:

1.) Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More 2.) Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder (OCD)

3.) Panic Disorder

4.) Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)

5.) Social Phobia (or Social Anxiety Disorder)

What must be understood is that anxiety disorders are physiological and psychological manifestations of the effect stressors have on the body.

In average cases where anxiety is present people feel varying degrees of nervousness, apprehension, and the desire to accomplish a task and get it over with; in the case of anxiety disorders the manifestation of symptoms take on far more debilitating effects such as trouble concentrating, restlessness, sleeping disorders, depression, flashbacks of traumas, chest pains and even cases where panic attacks ensure which debilitate a person’s ability to act in a rational manner (Côté et al., 784 – 787).

Another factor that should be taken into consideration is the fact that unlike normal cases of anxiety the symptoms associated with anxiety disorders do not go away after a short period of time but rather remain for differing extended periods of time (Vroling


NCB Customer Expectations and Perceptions Report essay help site:edu

Introduction The National Commercial Bank of Saudi Arabia was established in 1953. It was the initial bank in Saudi Arabia. Most of people, who knew about banking, depended solely on it for financial services. The citizens did not know about any other bank, as it was the only one, which existed (Baker 112).

Currently, this bank is the biggest in whole of Middle East. The latest information gotten about it indicates that it has a paid up capital of US $ 1600 million. Towards the end of 2007, the overall amount of assets that it owned were US $ 55658 million. In the same year of 2007, it managed a net profit of US $ 1610 million.

The bank is known for its efforts in delivering quality services to its customers for a long period it has existed in the market. Through leveraging technology, National Commercial Bank of Saudi Arabia is in a position to offer the most modern services among its competitors. It has also tried to maintain the traditions of Saudi Arabia, during its time of offering these services to its customers. It has 266 retail outlets that are committed in offering Islamic banking services.

One of its strength is its wide customer base, which is approximately 2 million, which is managed well through effective array of delivery control (Shaw 105). More to its effective services to customers, the National commercial bank of Saudi Arabia has approximately 942 ATMs and 7000point of sale outlets. It initiated the introduction of online-banking services in Saudi Arabia. It managed this, through the usage of credit cards to facilitate the mobile banking that made the services of customers more effective with time.

According to the news that were obtained in 2007, more than 85% of the customers banking services were done through alternative delivery channels, which was a sign of the advancement of the National Commercial Bank customer services. This bank is also known by its big space through which it operates its foreign exchange and money market in the whole of Middle East.

This effective service of handling foreign exchange has made its customers to be more satisfied as all their needs are` met satisfactorily within its premises. The main areas of the case study are the challenges that the bank faced, of the need to reduce manual processes, time and costs in efforts of giving its clients an online channel for its corporate clients (Shaw 503).

The solution of the challenge was the generation of a web-based solution that improved the flexibility and extensibility. The overall benefits that the bank enjoyed were streamlining the operations, improved customer service and reduced total operating costs that the bank incurred initially.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The case study In the year 2003, the National Commercial Bank was working tirelessly towards enhancing its banking services to some of its corporate bodies. This was the time when these corporate bodies, the clients of National Commercial Bank received services from the bank directly (Shaw 612). Through receiving these services directly, the corporate bodies’ clients, had the chance to interact with the bank through its retail outlets, whereby the work of the manual processes increased leading to some key issues that required to be addressed on time.

The main channel for corporate clients

It was a routine for these corporate clients to report to the bank branches for their normal enquiries and cash transactions. Although it was relying on the PC banking solution, which was a direct transaction to serve few customers, it was hard for the bank to reduce the branch overhead.

This was a result of the presence of a huge number of cashiers within one branch, and the increased foreign currency draft request, that were made by the corporate clients (Baker 316). All these transactions required some personnel to handle the manual operations at the branch levels. Most of the time, it was a must for the bank tellers to keep regular interaction with the treasury help desk to inquire and decide on the most favorable exchange rate to be used in settling the corporate clients.

Features in incumbent system

The use of Personal computer banking services in the branches resulted to limited functionality. The main issue that brought about some controversies was that, the cash management elements for coming up with the best exchange rates to handle the problems of the clients online were not available.

The treasury system could not solve the foreign currency issues through online mode. Another major issue that needed some attention was that, some liquidity management elements such as time deposits management were not readily available (Shaw 475).

For instance, incase there was a need for SWIFT payments to be made; the corporate client had to visit the bank branch or communicate with relationship manager to give the required authorization by fax. This act was not admirable, as it was resulting to some delays of urgent customer’s requests. Another issue that the bank faced was

Non Web-enabled transactions

This was a great challenge to both the bank and its customers. One of the major issues that challenged the bank is lack of a bank website, where the clients would access some of the information to solve their problems.

We will write a custom Report on NCB Customer Expectations and Perceptions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The absence of a bank web where the clients could visit for some solutions resulted to an increased manual processing for both the bank and its esteemed clients. For instance, the clients from the corporate bodies were forced to prepare their payroll sheets in advance by following the specifications that were required by the bank, and then present the sheets to the bank for further processing (Baker 580).

This was too much work for customers to handle, as they were expecting all this work done by the bank itself, through the application of the advanced technology. The bank developed a high desire of solving such problems to ensure that their customers were served well and satisfactorily without much struggle. This was also a desire for clients to receive the best form of services from their entrusted bank.

Solution overview

The National Commercial Bank of Saudi Arabia did an evaluation of how the banking solutions could be found online, and it managed to come up with Infosys as its technology partner that would provide solutions to its problems (Reid 226). Through collaborating with Infosys, there was an introduction of Infosys Finacle web based cash management software, which the bank planned to implement within the next one year.

The application of this web based cash management software with the help of other competent technologies like J2EE and .NET managed to solve major problems associated with online banking. Through the use of these technologies by the National Commercial Bank, it was possible to eliminate the hardships of travelling by providing anytime, anywhere access to the needed information by both the banks clients and the employees.

There were other benefits that the bank enjoyed from the introduction of such technologies like global liquidity management, short term clients investments through the bank, and easier management of international payments such making it to enjoy rich set of functionality (Reid 123).

The web based cash management software has a capability of offering multi-channel delivery through both the personal computer and other wireless devices. The application of this solution to the bank branches also ensures reduced Total Cost of Ownership, effective services to the clients, time saving for clients and the tellers, and quick maintenance for the bank in general.

Banks corporate customers

Another solution that was worth celebration by the banks clients was that the clients did not have to visit the bank branches for inquiries and other cash transactions like those that they used to do before. The new system gave the clients some opportunities to remotely login by use of a browser, do some inquiries, and later conduct some transactions with National commercial Bank.

The corporate customers still can as well access the liquidity management features through online, and handle some issues like setting up account sweep guidelines, come up with money market deals, and receive an automated reconciliation of the account cash transactions (Reid 201). This exercise allows clients to have access to their account whenever they need it, to ensure their accounts are safe and not tampered with by any stranger. These applications provided for more security of the clients account.

Not sure if you can write a paper on NCB Customer Expectations and Perceptions by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Cutting-edge features

By Finacle web based cash management software, the national commercial bank treasury is able to obtain the current online exchange rates that would be important while doing foreign exchange transactions with the corporate (Baker 405). It became possible for the corporate clients to receive the latest rate during the cash transactions with the bank.

This system also has a capability of allowing the corporate to send their draft requests online. The Finacle system also works with the National Commercial Bank especially the main banking system to ensure the clients requests are processed as quickly as possible.

The real time transaction processing

Another major improvement was that the corporate could easily send their payroll sheets through the internet a safe connection (Baker 315). Once the banks receive these payroll sheets to confirm whether they are in accordance with their specifications, the bank takes them to the main banking system for further processing.

This action saved much time as the corporate used to visit the bank branch to present their payroll sheets for final processing. Through the online services, the bank keeps on updating the corporate about the status of their payroll processes.

The benefits Through working hand in hand with Finacle the National Commercial Bank has managed to handle its business challenges, and has successfully met the demands of its clients especially the corporate ones (Reid 98).

The introduction of the online banking services creates a most convenient customer experience and effective services to be enjoyed by both clients and employees. One indication of showing that customers are enjoying the online banking services is through the increased number of the customers preferring online service to other retail outlets.

The banks online services act as a virtual branch for the National Commercial Bank thus reducing the overall operating cost of it, due to the decrease of corporate transactions and bank staffs. Moreover, the online services have resulted to rich functionality whereby the workload in every branch is reduced thus streamlining the overall operations. The accessibility of various transactions by the bank from one point became possible thus enabling it to fix the prices of the products and services in the best way.

According to the information obtained from the Deputy General Manager of National Commercial Bank, he confessed that the cash management solution made them to take very crucial steps. Such steps included adding business value to their corporate customers, receiving the flexibility and functionalities that would place them in a very competitive edge compared to other global banks (Reid 117).

The bank was also in a position to have a real time transaction processing potential and acquired a more business value according to their expectations. The deputy general manager of the bank gave a speech to assure the public how much the bank has benefitted from the Finacle web based cash management solution. There were no doubts that it enjoyed many benefits from this system especially fulfilling the dreams of their clients.

Some of the questions that may arise from the above case study are:


What were the challenges that were associated with the introduction of Finacle web based cash management solution.

Was the cost of installing the system worthy compared to the benefits that the bank enjoyed?

Is the bank still looking for more technological advancements?

Works Cited Baker, Michael. The Marketing Book. Michigan: Butterworth-Heinemann, 2007.

Reid, Robert. Hospitality Marketing Management. New York: John Wiley and Sons, 2009.

Shaw, John. International Marketing: Strategy and Theory. Michigan: Taylor


Economic Depression in USA Report online essay help: online essay help

Introduction Economic depression is defined as the sustained and prolonged down-turn in the economy of a country. Depression is considered more extreme and severe than economic recession. Though depression is considered a form of recession only that depression is characterized by its length, the abnormality of economic factors like rising cases of unemployment, decline in credit availability and also shrinking output and highly volatile monetary value.

Depression is linked to the following two indicators; decline in the Gross Domestic Product by a margin of more than 10% and secondly a recession period exceeding 2 years. According to Foldvary, recession is derived from the word recede that implies falling back and it lasts for a very short time and depression is understood based on the degree of output fall and the extend of the down-turn (Foldvary 3).

An economic depression happens when there is fall in output below the long-run trend.

The Depression of 1873-1879

This depression was as a result of the bankruptcy of the railroad investment firm of Jay Cooke and company and particularly the restrictive monetary policy of the federal government; this is whereby the gold standard increment could not maintain the pressure for money demands that could enhance the growth of the economy. Deflation is also a factor that led to this depression (Watkins and Allay 1)

The Depression of 1893-1898

This was considered to be the worst form of depression ever witnessed in the US before the 1930. It first emanated from the agricultural crises that affected the southern cotton belt and the Great Plains in 1880s and it later hit the Wall Street and the urban areas in 1893.

This from of depression led to a massive unemployment which is still considered the highest in the US history at 20-25%, the depression resulted in widespread poverty among the Americans of various income levels. The magnitude of the depression was so acute that by 12896, it was made a popular subject of political campaigns (Edwards 1)

The Great Depression of 1929-1933

The United States of America experienced the worst, the longest and the most severe economic depression in the year 1929. This depression led to an acute decline in output, extreme unemployment and drastic deflation in the USA and it has been ranked the second calamity to the civil war.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This depression was largely associated to several factors like the reduced consumer demand, great financial panic and misplaced government spending that forced a fall in economic output.

This depression led to the reduction in industrial production by 47% and the subsequent reduction of the Gross Domestic product (GDP) by 30%, it also resulted in the decline in the wholesale price index or otherwise referred as deflation by 33%; also the unemployment rate reached 20% which was considered the highest point at that time (Romer 1).

This depression is just considered severe when compared to the next depression to hit America in the year 1981-82 that resulted in the decline of GDP by 2%. The USA recovery from this depression began in 1933 when the GDP began to improve at 95 per annum (Romer 3).

The 1930 depression saw the increased level of unemployment characterized by a lot of labor force but no work to do and the worst part of depression was in 1933 when the unemployment rate fall below 10%. Recession appeared twice during the great depression, in the august of 1929 and March of 1933 between as indicated by the following graph;

Concerning unemployment, the high rate of unemployment is demonstrated by the following graph;

Another main indicator of the great depression is the GDP which was greatly affected as seen in the following graph;

During the great depression, the most hit sector was the banking sector. The following table is an indication of how banks were affected including the number of suspended banks and also indicates the decrease in the number of banks as a result of merger, failure or collapse and voluntary liquidation.

We will write a custom Report on Economic Depression in USA specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Number of banks and bank suspension

Year Number as of 12-31 Suspensions 1929 24,633 659 1930 22,773 1350 1931 19970 2293 1932 18,397 1453 1933 15,015 4000 1934 16,096 57 Causes of the Great Depression The most critical cause of the great depression in the USA was the reduction in spending or otherwise referred as the reduced aggregate demand; this resulted in decline in production since manufacturer noticed an anticipated rise in inventories. This was reflected in other countries due to the factor of gold standard. Other factors that necessitated the great depression are:

The stock market crash: the great depression is associated with the tight US monetary policy that targeted the limitation of stock market speculation; this was due to the mild recession that had been witnessed between 1924 and 1927 that had witnessed the massive rise in the stock prices in 1920 and reached the optimum in 1929 and as an immediate measure, the federal reserve had raised the interest rates in order to stop this spiraling stock prices and this largely affected the construction and the auto mobile industries.

The fall in the stock prices in 1929 to extend that could not be justified by the anticipation rate resulted to the loss of investor confidence and subsequent bubble burst in the stock market.

This led to the panic selling on black ‘Thursday’ on October 24, 1929. The previous rise on stock prices had triggered a massive purchase of stock by the investors using loans and hence this price decline forced some investors to liquidate their holdings thus worsening the fall in prices. This crash in the stock market led to the considerable reduction in the consumer aggregate demand especially in the area of durable goods and investments and great fall in output.

Banking panic and monetary contraction: this was experienced in the year 1930; banking panic occurs when “many depositors lose confidence in the solvency of banks and simultaneously demand their deposits be paid to them in cash” (Romer 8); this can lead to those banks that hold deposits as cash reserves to liquidate loans so that they be in position to pay the cash demands. This process of immediate liquidation can force any solvent bank to collapse.

This continued till 1933 when President Franklin Roosevelt proclaimed the ‘bank holiday’ in 1933 that involved the closing of all banks and could only re-open upon being considered solvent by the government inspectors. Economists largely associate this bank panic to the “increased farm debt in 1920” (Romer 8) and government policy that encouraged “small and undiversified banks” (Romer 8).

The gold standard: economists largely associate the 1929-1933 great depression to the Federal Reserve; they accused the federal reserve of causing a big decline in the American money as a measure to preserve the gold standard. The gold standard implied that each country should fix the value of its currency based on the standard of gold.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Economic Depression in USA by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More International lending and trade: the USA had expanded its foreign lending to Germany and the Latin America, this declined in the 1928 and 1929 due to the high interest rates and the flourishing stock market; “this reduction in foreign lending resulted in credit contraction and the reduction in the output of borrower countries” (Romer 8).

Economic impact of the Great War: when the first broke, no one expected that it would be of the magnitude witnessed; no one predicted the length of the war, the economic expenses of the war and the degree of destruction.

The war caused a lot of infrastructural destruction, loss of lives and monetary value in the countries of Europe; this on the other hand precipitated a period of economic boom in the countries of Canada, USA and Latin America since the countries of Europe exhausted their gold reserves to borrow money, other countries also printed extra money. This war interrupted with patterns of domestic and international trade which preceded the economic depression.

Sources of Recovery The two main ways of curbing the inflation were indentified as the currency devaluation and monetary expansion. Devaluation “allowed countries to expand their money supplies without concern about gold movements and exchange rates” (Romer 8). Another way of curbing the crises was through the imposition of protectionism measure; this led to the launch of various tariffs, the 1988 US presidential seat was won through protectionist ticket.

Economic Impact of Depression The depression influenced the US economy in a great way; some of them include the following:

Human suffering: for the very short time of the depression, there was drastic increase in the output and the standard of living also a substantial fraction of the labor force could not find employment.

Change on world economy: the great depression brought to the end the international gold standard era.

Increased government involvement in the economy: after the depression, there was an increased government participation in the economy particularly in the financial market; evidence was the establishment of the Securities and Exchange Commission by the USA.

Development of macro-economic policies: most of these policies were aimed at curbing the downturns and the upturns.

Conclusion Depression is considered one of the worst macroeconomic aspects that can befall a country; the effects of economy are so devastating since its impact can be felt across the world. The US have experienced a lot five depressions of different magnitude and that has equipped it with experience on the various macroeconomic issues that are required to tame any further depression. The US has on the recent past experienced only recessions which are considered mild form of depression.

It is worth mentioning that from the five economic depressions to have hit the US, all the possible remedies have been tried and applied, despite all the efforts it is not clear whether the business cycle that lead to depressions has been removed. Depression an also be considered a natural economic aspect that can be beyond government intervention. This is exemplified by the economic depression of 1907 and 1920 which was eliminated within a year without the government intervening.

Works Cited Edwards, Rebecca. The depression of 1893. Projects, 2000. Web.

Foldvary, Fred. The Depression of 2008 2nd edition. The Gutenberg Press, 2008. Web.

Romer, Christina. Encyclopedia Britannica. Berkeley, 2003. Web.

Watkins, Thayer and Allay, Tornado. The depression of 1873-1879. University of San Jose State, 2011. Web.


Work Place Stress Essay college essay help

Stress is a situation in the nature of human beings where they are numerous internal or external forces affecting an individual. Stress arises in a situation when we as individuals feel that we are overloaded by forces that are too much and therefore we can not handle (Hicks and McSherry, 2007).

The result of stress is physical and emotional imbalances. So in a broad way, stress is when there is poor match between the job and the numerous demands of a worker at the work place resulting to physical, emotional and psychological distances (Hicks and McSherry, 2007).

In other words, work place stress can also be described as the situations at the work place that causes imbalance of an employee demands leading to low amount of control over situations. Generally, stress at the work place might result from many angles and have different effects to the party affected depending with the intensity of the stress. In most cases, various work related stress can have diverse effects to either the employee or the employer.

Discussion Stress can be positive or negative also depending on its intensity. Positive stress is the category of stress that makes an employee or employer at the work place to work towards making positive progress which may include; strict deadlines, making sales to get commission, finding new customers and so on (Hicks and McSherry, 2007).

These kinds of stress will motivate an individual to work hard towards attaining the objectives and therefore such category of stress can be regarded as positive. On the other hand, when an individual at the place is faced by too much prsessure to meet several demands at the work place, it can contribute to negative effects and which may result to physical and emotional damage.

Causes of work related stress

Depending with the nature of work or the work environment, there are several categories of work related stress that can occur. Such categories would include, unique experiences at work place, stress related to ones responsibility at the work place, individual career development, interpersonal relationship, and workplace environment ( 2008). The following discussion will look into each factor in a brief way for a broader understanding.

Our environment of work has a lot to do with determining how we are able to perform our duties and responsibility at the work. The management system put in place can contribute to stress especially if it is not friendly. Additionally, if the communication pattern is not favorable it may also result to some level of stress.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, the level of employee participation in decision making when it comes to solving issues at the work place may also result to stress especially if an individual is not given a chance to offer his opinions ( 2008).

The second factor that may also cause some level of stress is the issue of individual responsibility at the workplace. When an employee such as the manager is given multiple of responsibilities, it may be very challenging in dealing with all those responsibilities due to conflict of interest that arises. Additionally, when an individual is faced by an issue of role ambiguity more than ever if one is not sure about which role he/she is expected to perform within an organization; such a situation may also cause stress ( 2008).

Issues related to individual’s career development may also be a major cause to stress. Situations where an individual has worked hard for a long time in an organization but he/she is not awarded a promotion opportunity may cause emotional and economical stress in diverse ways ( 2008).

Once more, when an individual at the work place is facing panic to job security since one has not signed a contract for instance or if one is working under temporary basis, this may also cause emotional stress in one way or the other. On the other hand, Cases of over promotion may also have some forms of stress in a positive way because it will cause excitement to the affected party since such a chance is offering an individual with career development opportunities.

Finally, issues of interpersonal relationship and the way the employees and employers relate at the work place may also be the cause of stress. Most common scenario is when the supervisors or manager may be too demanding and at times issuing threats, harassing employees, personal threats or even inflicting physical damages to their subordinates ( 2008).

When the subordinates at the work place are not able to relate well with their bosses or the managers, it may cause high level of stress. Finally, when fellow colleagues are not relating well due to personal differences among other factors, it may also be the cause of stress at the work place.

Effects of workplace stress

Stress can be a major source of many troubles to both our work and our selves. There are a number of ways in which the work related stress can affect us. One such ways is that, stress can cause harmful health effects to our bodies (Employment Assistance Limited, 2003). According to medical and science researches, our bodies are automatically designed in a way to deal with stress.

We will write a custom Essay on Work Place Stress specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The way the body is designed to deal with deal with such stress is so effective only for short term problems. When we experience severe and high levels of stress, our bodies can not be able to deal with it and this may results to effects such as; depression, increased blood pressure, increase in allergic responses, pain and other medical related problems (Employment Assistance Limited, 2003).

On the other hand, apart from medical problems that can be caused by work related stress, they are other categories of stress including emotional and economical stress. For instance, when an employee is faced by problem such as poor interpersonal relationship where there is cases of harassment, discrimination and so forth; such problems may cause emotional stress which will result to an individual declining work or even cause fights in the work place.

To the organization, work related stress can result to under-performance of the affected workers which will obviously slow down the activities of the company and hence also slow down achievements of the organization. As such, when there is any negative form of workplace stress, the work is also affected and the objectives of the company are not meet sufficiently (Employment Assistance Limited, 2003).

In this era of economical hard times, there is need to address issues that cause stress in the work place for better of the employees and for success of the company. This is because most times, people within their place of work find themselves really having to deal with stress instead of being relaxed.

As such, due to such stress, the organization is not able to achieve. For this reason, there are a number of ways which people can be able to take on in order to facilitate physical, emotional well being and relaxed mind which is free from stress at their places of work.

Conclusion and Recommendations The first step towards being stress free is by taking responsibility; all people should take it as personal responsibility to make their life better for their well-being, this can only be achieved through dedicating ones self to making sure that they perform their duties as expected at all times (Segal, Smith, Robinson and Segal, 2001).

Additionally, individuals should prioritize the needs of the work by being more organized in their line of duty, this will be one way in which the employees and employers will be able to handle situations in a positive way; through such ways one can always reduce quarrels, and unnecessary arguments at the place of work.

Secondly, managers and supervisors should devise ways of improving communication system within the work place to facilitate effective communication that will ease interpersonal relationship between coworkers, the management and other sensitive areas where conflicts may arise (Sega et al, 2001).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Work Place Stress by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Communication is an important aspect in resolving issues, so when there is a good and effective communication within the organization, both employees and employers can be able to participate in solving conflicts in a calm way and therefore avoid situations that can lead to stress.

Finally, both the managers and workers can always work towards reducing work related stress by cultivating a social and a friendly work environment (Employment Assistance Limited, 2003). This can be achieved thorough improved communication and regular meeting for consultation where involved parties will be able to talk about their problems and make necessary recommendations that can be put in place for a better work place (Sega et al, 2001).

References (2008). Work place stress. Retrieved from

Segal, J. Smith, M., Robinson, L.


The Significance of Lower Taxes to the average Canadian Citizen Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction Lower taxes, also referred to as a tax-cut, is the reduction in taxes levied over individuals and corporations. Lower taxation has varied implications on the economy, both positive and negative. However, the immediate effects of lower taxes are a decrease in the actual income of the government and an increase in the actual income of the ordinary citizens whose taxation rates have been reduced.

The reduction in the government’s income may be lessened depending on the reaction of tax-payers. Depending on the proportion of tax-reductions, lower taxes may provide persons and corporations with motivation investments that may increase economic growth, and in turn increase the total taxable income and hence increase the government’s earnings.

Lower taxes, in most cases, stimulates economic activity especially if it is accompanied by lower government spending. Even though many people associate lower taxes with lower economic activity, it does the exact opposite; tax cuts encourage ordinary citizens to purchase more products and services, stimulating the economy and thus creating more job opportunities (Aron-Dine and Kogan, 2006).

Lower taxes ensure less money goes to the government and more of it stays in the pockets of the ordinary citizens and this has a hugely positive impact on the economy as it results in an active, free economy to boom. Therefore, lower taxes are essential to the well-being, both socially and economically, on the average Canadian citizen.

Discussion Although critics of tax cuts argue that this action reduces the government’s ability to deliver services to the ordinary citizens, studies have proved otherwise, and indeed stated that lower taxes are more beneficial to the general population. While high taxes increase the government’s ability to provide basic services, lower taxes can have a similar effect, even greater.

However, it depends on the taxpayer’s response in the way they use the additional income and also the government’s response towards a decrease in income, such as reduced spending. The notion of high tax rates is simply ridiculous. When citizens pay less taxes as a proportion of their net pay, this positively impacts the amount of money available for spending.

With increased money in their pockets, ordinary Canadians are able to purchase more products and services leading to a vibrant and free economy. It is vital to note that the money spent by the government is not theirs, it belongs to the taxpayers. Lower taxes ensure that the ordinary citizens choose how to spend their money, leading to a free economy (Larson, 2003).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Lower taxes on the manufacturing, service, and business segments of the economy allows them to spend more money on their enterprises and create more employment opportunities, this ultimately benefits the ordinary Canadian citizens. Besides, an increase in commercial activity avails more revenue to the government as a result of an increase in the amount of taxable income, and allows the government to maintain or even raise its delivery of vital social programs and health care (Halpern, 1997).

An increase in revenue also ensures that the government borrows less money and reduces the government’s debt, easens pressure on currency supply and interest rates, leading to lower interest rates, which is important to the social and economic wee being of every Canadian citizen. Tax cuts are a classic example of the saying “less is more” and any sensible government should always strive to find ways of reducing taxation and its own spending (Singleton and Slivinski, 1999).

Perhaps one of the most effective ways of enhancing innovation is to lower tax rates for both individuals and companies. When more remains in the hands of the privates sector through tax cuts, investors will have more money to support innovation. Since there is a strong link between lower taxes and economic growth, an economy that is increasingly dependent on technological advances, such as Canada’s economy, a tax system that is unfriendly to economic growth must be adjusted (National Bureau of Economic Research,1991).

Drawing from the US economy, which is currently experiencing the slowest growth rate since 1776, it is evident that expansive government programs cannot actually sustain a healthy economic growth rate. An increase in tax rates does more harm to the private sector than the positives created by government intervention.

To restore economic growth, including a healthy rate of innovation, the first step is to lower taxes so that the private sector can finance its own innovation itself (Burman, (2001). Giving the private sector the freedom to fund its own investment activities is the most reasonable solution. Innovation involves high risks and when the government funds innovation activities using taxpayer’s money, every taxpayer bears the loss if the projects fail.

However, private investors can choose their own levels of risks since their own money is on the line, therefore, they have a strong motivation to choose sensibly. In addition, as the economy expands and becomes globalized, the total amount of money required to support innovative technologies will be inexplicably huge and any government investment will be a drop in the ocean.

Innovation helps the ordinary Canadian citizen in numerous ways, such as e-commerce, medical procedures, automotive and aerospace, and in electronics and telecommunications. Therefore, in order to enhance innovation, which ultimately benefits every member of the population, the government must lower tax rates.

We will write a custom Essay on The Significance of Lower Taxes to the average Canadian Citizen specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The idea of high taxes is simply unacceptable. It is a counterproductive strategy that trickles down to the ordinary taxpayer. High taxes have always been found to discourage businesses from expanding or investing into other sectors of the economy, or discouraging the ordinary Canadian citizen from establishing new business ventures.

When the ordinary citizens retract from establishing new businesses and other established businesses fail to expand their operations, the economy shrinks and the common taxpayer feels the pinch. Economists have often stated tat it is the smaller businesses, and to some degree the rich, that increase the size of the national cake.

Hence, economic growth greatly depends on small businesses and not the government. First, the government does not create any money, rather, they take it from the taxpayers and spend it on various national projects. Besides, the poor creates little money and contribute minimally to the economy, therefore, the middle class, to which most Canadians belong, are left to pay most of taxes.

The rich, who are said to contribute significantly to the economy, pay their taxes on the backs of the middle class who are either employees or buyers of the products from businesses owned by the rich. When taxation rates are high, the rich tend to pass over the additional costs to the middle class. An increase in taxation may cause companies to lay off their staff leading to loss of jobs or production of shoddy products in order to counter the high tax rates.

Therefore, either way, the average Canadian citizen is hit hard by high taxation rates. High taxes also have the effect of discouraging multinational corporations from investing in a country, thus eliminating the advantages that come with these establishments, such as the availability of quality and standardized products, job opportunities, and improvement of basic infrastructure.

Conclusion Lower tax rates are of great benefit to the ordinary Canadian citizen as discussed above. However, it should be noted that these tax cuts, or lower taxes, do not automatically have positive outcomes to the ordinary citizen. The success of lower tax rates partly depends on the response by the government to lower its spending. While this may be simple on paper, very few governments ever reduce their spending, even in the middle of a recession.

However, with suitable government reactions, lower taxes can result into several benefits for the ordinary taxpayer. First, lower taxes increase the amount of money available to taxpayers for spending and hence encourage ordinary citizens to purchase more products and services, stimulating the economy and thus creating more job opportunities. Besides, lower taxes ensure that the ordinary citizens choose how to spend their money, leading to a free economy.

This increase in commercial activity increases government revenue, and allows it to maintain or even raise its delivery of vital social programs and health care, which are directly accessed by the ordinary citizen. Secondly, lower taxation is important towards encouraging a culture of innovation around the country. Innovation is important in almost all sector of the economy, such as transport, healthcare, commerce, communication, entertainment, among others.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Significance of Lower Taxes to the average Canadian Citizen by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These services are accessed by the ordinary citizen in almost every facet of his/her life. Finally, high taxation rates have several negative implications to the ordinary Canadian taxpayer, for instance, high taxation rates discourage businesses from expanding or investing into other sectors of the economy, ordinary citizens also shy away from establishing new businesses. These repercussions may shrink the economy, leading to more harmful economic implications.

References Aron-Dine, A., and Kogan, R. (2006). Claim That Tax Cuts “Pay For Themselves” Is Too Good To Be True. Retrieved from


Presidential Elections of 1804 Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Among the most crucial elections ever held in the history of the United States of America, the 1800 elections were the most vital. Washington was considered reliable by the people and the judgment as well as ability of anyone who was behind him was considered as an open query.

As Sharp stated, “While political parties played no role in the 1792 election, they certainly did in the 1800 election. The election was notable because of the extremely partisan nature of the election and the vitriolic attacks on former Revolution War friends and colleagues” (189)

As Dunn observed “It was particularly important as it resulted in the first transfer of power from one party to the other and despite the contentious nature of the election, it occurred peacefully with President Adams quietly leaving Washington before President Jefferson’s inauguration”(241). This event was of very significant value, as it involved a change of command to a political adversary in a peaceful manner.

Among the main reasons that the reign of one line of heirs to power had thrived, was because of the fact that with each change of guard, there was always peace. Therefore, the perceived precedent that was put in place by the republican elite which was considered untrustworthy was a very important step in the right direction towards peaceful transitions. A key reconfiguration within American political parties was in the making.

The long ruling Federalists nationalist party was subdued and eventually out-done by the alignment of the Democratic Party as well as the Republican Party. This was in the Congressional polls. Then ruling President Adam, strategically set up the Federal courts with the Federalists so as to continually wield authority via the courts that were essentially ran by the Federalists. John Marshall was the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court at the time.

In 1804, the presidential elections of the United States of America was a race that placed the sitting President Thomas Jefferson against Federalist Charles Cotesworth Pinckney. Rogers stated that “Thomas Jefferson easily defeated Charles Cotesworth Pinckney in the first presidential polls conducted following the ratification of the twelfth amendment to the United States Constitution” (115).

Rogers further states that “Under the rules of the Twelfth Amendment, presidential electors were required to specify in their votes their choice for presidents and vice presidents; previously, electors voted only for President, with the person who came in second becoming the Vice President” (116).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More President Thomas Jefferson’s Vice President became George Clinton who proceeded to serve under President Thomas Jefferson as well as his successor. In all of the American presidential elections which have had many key party contenders vying for the top seat that have been held, Thomas Jefferson’s percentage point winning scope has never been surpassed by any of them and maintains the top spot in those regards.

Thomas Jefferson’s early days started in Virginia where he grew up and was brought up with his father’s friend’s children who was deceased. His father was Colonel Peter Jefferson who died while Thomas was still at the tender age of fourteen. His mother was Jane Randolph. His wife passed on ten years into their marriage.

A priest by the name William Douglas tutored the young Jefferson from the age of nine until he was fourteen years old. Among the schools that he attended were the college of William and Mary as well as Reverend James Maury’s School. He learnt from the priest Latin, French as well as Greek. As Rogers observed “Thomas Jefferson got admission to the bar in the year 1767 after completing his studies with famed law professor George Wythe who was the first American law professor” (71).

Between the years 1776 and 1779, Thomas Jefferson was an associate of Continental Congress and later on joined up as an affiliate of the Virginia House of Delegates. This was after performing duties in the House of Burgesses between 1769 and 1774.

Thomas Jefferson was party to the Committee of Correspondence and argued anti-Britain stating that their interests were hostile towards the United States of America. He also wrote the declaration of independence. He was a Governor at one point in time, as the revolutionary war escalated in the years 1779-1781. Later on, when the war was over, he was posted to France as a minister. In his book Chernow observed that

“President George Washington appointed Jefferson to be the first Secretary of State. He clashed with Alexander Hamilton, Secretary of the Treasury, on how the US should deal with France and Britain. Hamilton also desired a stronger federal government than Jefferson. Jefferson eventually resigned because he saw that Washington was more strongly influenced by Hamilton than him. Jefferson later served as Vice President under John Adams from 1797-1801” (127).

Thomas Jefferson vied in a very hotly contested poll in opposition to John Adams who he had previously been his Vice President. Thomas Jefferson ran as the republican presidential candidate and with Aaron Burr as his running mate.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Presidential Elections of 1804 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of the acts that the Federalists utilized to their own gains was the Alien and Sedition Act which Thomas Jefferson had in the past very enthusiastically conflicted with together Madison, stating that they were against the charter. A tie in the poll count was all that was needed to kick off a major storm regarding the vote count.

Presidential polls will in most cases be very passionate affairs for most of the contestants. It is not something that is fresh to the scene. Ever since a long time ago, people vying for political clout have slandered each other, spread rumors as well as sent messages implying that their rivals have the wrong plans.

However in the year 1800, these allegations were most highly pronounced as the rivalry between Thomas Jefferson and John Adam attained heights of viciousness unknown before. Jefferson was continuously slandered by the Federalists stating that all evils that he performed would be encouraged if he took power. Thomas Jefferson was alleged to have stolen as well as lied to the people.

However, Jefferson endured all this and went on to be the victor in the polls. The second time round that he vied, Thomas Jefferson went through even more disrepute as his foes were very aggressive towards him. He endured unmitigated rumors regarding his religious beliefs and he knew how to handle this disrepute from his prior experiences. Thomas Jefferson went ahead and triumphed in the ballots with a landslide victory.

President Thomas Jefferson explained the immense support that he attained by appraising his regimes achievements during his first term. This was much earlier in his second introductory speech. Thomas Jefferson had foreseen his party swoop and carry away all the states except four of them in the polls.

The results were much more impressive than anticipated. He won his that round with a resounding victory by beating the Federalists in most states. President Thomas Jefferson observed in his statement the fact that he declared the principle upon which he believed it was his duty to lead the matters of state. He said that he had the belief that his conscience he had acted up to the declaration.

President Thomas Jefferson went on to assert that outside associations had become better and at the same time domestic taxes were stopped. He stated that the tax levied on imported goods allowed for a tinier administration in the country as well as widening of the state via additional acquisition of Indian as well as Louisiana land by purchasing it so as to reduce national debt.

The topic of Louisiana was of great importance to President Thomas Jefferson since it was viewed as one of his key achievements by the people. Pasley made the observation that “Based primarily in New England and determined to protect that region’s trade and shipping interests, the Federalists were uneasy with the country’s westward movement and the growing importance of the port of New Orleans”(74-88). Fortunately, according to President Thomas Jefferson many Americans were awed by the conclusion of the voting. Pasley was of the opinion that

Not sure if you can write a paper on Presidential Elections of 1804 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More “The achievements of Jefferson’s first term had assured that he would be re-nominated by his party. But the Republican caucus, which met in February 1804, had dropped the Vice President Aaron Burr in favor of New York’s governor, George Clinton, as Jefferson’s running mate. Burr had lost the confidence of many Republicans during the drawn-out election of 1800. In that contest, Jefferson, then vice president, defeated the Federalist incumbent, John Adams.

But because the Republicans had failed to make sure at least one electoral vote for vice presidential candidate Burr was withheld, Jefferson and Burr tied for the presidency. The contest went to the House of Representatives, where Federalists seized the opportunity to block Jefferson’s election by giving their votes to Burr. The deadlock was not broken until mid-February 1801, when the House elected Jefferson on its 36th ballot”. (111-124)

Because of the fact that Burr did not extract his name from disputation for the presidency, Thomas Jefferson and other Republicans ended up skeptical of his allegiance and were edgy with his holding a spot of such national status. As Jefferson commenced the sorting out his organization, he disregarded Burr’s benefaction as well as recommendations and did not confer with him on procedure assessment. Chernow stated that

“In 1804, aware that he would not be a part of the national ticket, Burr challenged the Republicans in his home state of New York by running for governor. The Federalists considered supporting Burr to create greater division among the Republicans, but Federalist leader Alexander Hamilton spoke out strongly against Burr, and others asked, is he to be used by the Federalists, or is he a two-edged sword, that must not be drawn?

Burr lost the New York election in the spring of 1804, and cast much of the blame on Hamilton. This was one factor that led to their famous duel in July of that year. Hamilton’s death was considered the death of Burr’s political career as well, yet he returned to Washington to complete his term as vice president. President Jefferson completely divorced himself from Burr, saying, There never had been an intimacy between us, and but little association.”(98-111)

Support from the people went across the party outline but was far from undisputed. The law was not conceded by mutual houses in anticipation of December 1803. The bid sent to the states for consent specified that as members of the electorate meet in their particular states, “they shall name in their ballots the person voted for as President, and in distinct ballots the person voted for as Vice-President.” Pasley observed that

“As any change to the Constitution required ratification by three-fourths of the states, Jefferson and Secretary of state left Washington for the summer recess with the electoral process still undecided. Madison assured Jefferson that all was ready “for giving effect to the proposed amendment.” But it was not until Sept. 25, 1804, that Madison was able to declare that the 12th Amendment to the Constitution had been ratified.

In keeping with the practice of the time, Jefferson and his Federalist rival, Charles Cotesworth Pinckney of South Carolina (who had been Adams’ running mate in 1800), abstained from any overt campaigning. Both relied instead upon their party machinery working at the grassroots level and through the press.” (59-70)

The toughest antagonism to Jefferson was found in New England. Palsey said “Federalist William Plumer of New Hampshire express grief that Jefferson as well as his supporters was even permitted to describe them republican, supposing Democrats and Jacobins far more apt” (83).

Plumer sketched six daily articles via the alias Cato, in which he went by the whole time of Jefferson’s opinionated vocation from secretary state up to the time of his presidency while still referencing Jefferson’s only available script, Notes on the State of Virginia, to chart what he deemed as Jefferson’s unpredictability. Pasley depicted that,

“Despite these efforts, Plumer had to record in his personal journal entry for Feb. 13, 1805, his party’s overwhelming loss. When the electoral ballots were counted that day before a joint session of Congress, Jefferson and Clinton received 162 votes apiece while Pinckney and his running mate, Rufus King of New York, had 14 apiece. It was none other than Aaron Burr, sitting as presiding officer of the Senate, who declared that Thomas Jefferson had been elected president and George Clinton vice president”.(162)

Thomas Jefferson had run for re-election to verify the state’s endorsement. He inscribed in January 1804: “The detestable slanders of my opinionated adversaries have gratified me to label that decree from my motherland in the solitary way it can be found.” In his book, Pasley said “He concluded that a favorable vote would be my sufficient voucher to the rest of the world and to posterity, and leave me free to seek, at a definite time, the repose I sincerely wished to have retired to now” (89).

Pasley went further ahead to say “Certainly the election of 1804 gave validation to Jefferson and direction set by his administration. It would prove to be the apex of his political career, as the accomplishments of his first term would not be matched in his second”.

Wills says “The 1804 US Election was the 5th Presidential election in America. It was the first ever election carried on after the ratification of the 12th Amendment to the Constitution of United States (98-112). The election was fought mainly between the incumbent Democratic-Republican President, Thomas Jefferson and Federalist, Charles Cotesworth Pinckney. Jefferson achieved 162 electoral votes and became the President of America for the second successive term. Jefferson’s running mate, George Clinton became the Vice President of America.

Before the ratification of Twelfth Amendment, presidential electors were allowed to vote only for the President. The person who ended up second used to be the Vice President. The 12th Amendment modified Article II of US Constitution. Will’s also added that, “as a result of that change, the United States Electoral College was asked to elect both the President and Vice President in a single election” (82).

After the ratification of 12th Amendment on 15th June, 1804, the electors were asked to cast two distinct votes, one for the President and one for the Vice President. Wills, in his book explains that,

“The presidential election of 1804 would be the first conducted under the 12th Amendment which was ratified in June 1804. Previously, whichever presidential candidate received the second highest electoral vote became vice president. The new amendment mandated separate ballots for the office of president and vice president.

During the previous Presidential tenure of Thomas Jefferson, American trade flourished. At the same time, French Revolutionary War in Europe came to an end. These two matters eventually enhanced the popularity of Thomas Jefferson. There was no other person in the US who shared his popularity or his public stature, making his win all but a matter of time.

In 1804, US Presidential election, Thomas Jefferson got 104,110 popular votes, whereas Charles Cotesworth Pinckney got 38,919 popular votes.

The pattern of political contention of 1804 was rich with current events: a national effort to decrease the public debt; Haitian independence declared in January as residents defeat French forces trying to re-establish slavery on the island; the launch of the Lewis and Clark expedition from St. Louis in May 1804; and trade questions stemming from the war between England and France. (47–89)

There is often intense competition amongst candidates in a presidential race. This phenomenon is not new. Since 1800, candidates have been hitting each other with slander, rumors, and bad messages. In 1800, this was especially true. The race between Thomas Jefferson and John Adams was vicious. The Federalists persistently attacked Jefferson, saying things such as, “Murder, robbery, rape, adultery, and incest will all be openly taught and practiced.” (Connecticut Courant) Jefferson was said to have cheated and robbed people.

Still, Jefferson persisted and managed to win the race. Again in 1804, his competition was fierce. This second race of Jefferson’s races was even worse than the first. Rumors were spread about him and his religious beliefs were attacked. But, Jefferson learned from his previous experience, and was able to hold out and win by a landslide.

As was further observed by Will’s in his book, “The Democratic-Republicans nominate Thomas Jefferson of Virginia. Jefferson seeks his second term as president after a lengthy career in public service in which he served as governor of Virginia, vice president, Secretary of State, and Minister to France” (66).

In his foremost time as head, Jefferson not just merely doubled the capacity of the United States by means of the Louisiana procurement, but he launched the first national exploration of the continent as well in hopes of attaining added United States trade as well as methodical awareness.

McCullough observes that “Jefferson’s running mate on the Democratic-Republican ticket is George Clinton, governor of New York. As a young man Clinton fought in the French and Indian War, and later became an attorney who defended members of the Sons of Liberty. He served as a member of the Second Continental Congress before being commissioned a brigadier general during the American Revolution.

Opposing President Jefferson is Charles Cotesworth Pinckney of South Carolina, running on the Federalist ticket. Pinckney rose to the rank of general in the Revolutionary War, and served nearly two years as a prisoner of the war after the fall of Charleston in 1780.

A proponent of a strong central government, Pinckney was one of the first leaders in the National Constitutional Convention. He represented the United States briefly in the Netherlands and France, and commanded American forces in the South between 1798 and 1800 when war with France seemed imminent”. (99-116)

America got caught up in warfare with the Barbary nations during his era in charge between 1801 and 1805. The United States of America had been paying accolade to buccaneer from this province to bring to a standstill assaults on American vessels. When the buccaneers solicited for supplementary money, Jefferson declined, leading Tripoli to proclaim confrontation.

This finished in victory for the United States for who it was no longer an obligation to disburse accolade to Tripoli. However, America did go on with payments to the rest of the Barbary countries. McCullough states that “in 1803, President Thomas Jefferson purchased the Louisiana territory from France for $15 million.

This is considered the most important act of his administration. He sent Lewis and Clark on their famous expedition to explore the new territory”. (96) In 1807, as McCullough further stated “Jefferson ended the overseas slave trade that started in January 1, 1808. He also set up the pattern of Executive Privilege as elucidated above” (97).

Works Cited Bowling, Kenneth and Kennon, Donald. Establishing Congress: The Removal to Washington D.C. and the Election of 1800. Cleveland: Ohio University Press, 2005. Print.

Chernow, Ron. Alexander Hamilton, London: Penguin, 2005. Print.

Dunn, Susan. Jefferson’s second revolution: The Election Crisis of 1800 and the Triumph of Republicanism. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, 2004. Print.

McCullough, David. John Adam. New York: Simon


Analysis of “If you assign my book don’t censor it” Opinion Essay scholarship essay help

Mark Mathabane successfully persuades readers about the importance of leaving his book uncensored through use of strong words, great organizational structure and reasonability of his arguments.

Mathabane wrote this article at a time when teachers in certain schools had assigned the book to their students but chose to censor a crucial scene in the essay “Kaffir Boy”.

He therefore wrote this article in response to the controversial reception of his book. He was trying to persuade teachers, school administrators, parents and other education stakeholders that the original, uncensored version of his article should be used in schools. In other words, his main audience consisted of people who had the authority to hide certain parts of his story. He needed to convince them that those very elements that they censored immediately neutralized the effect of the story and undermined its effectiveness.

The author has shown that he is a credible writer in this area. He talks about his strategy and approach to writing books. Mathabane affirms that raw emotional appeal is one of his major unique points so he intended to portray the prostitution scene just as it was. Furthermore, his clarification of the importance of that scene to the story further confirms to readers that he knows what he was writing about.

He also talks about his life as a father of three so as to illustrate to parents that he relates to their concerns. This convinces them that he understands what it means to write for children. Mathabane is aware of the controversy in his book and does not try to dissuade all educational stakeholders from their persuasions. He simply wants them to leave the book as it is without altering that crucial passage.

Mathabane appears confident as a writer because he is immensely aware of the virtues that his books represent such as honesty and clarity and these are subsequently related to the controversial passages. A reference has been made to reading list guides and other strategies that have been used to deal with objectionable material. This is obviously someone who understands the workings of his industry.

Many arguments made in the article are quite reasonable and contribute towards the overall persuasiveness of his essay. Readers are made to realize that the prostitution scene was a crucial element in the story as it had moral, thematic and schematic relevance. He explains how children can learn how to overcome peer pressure by reading that scene, how the theme of poverty is advanced through the book and how the rest of the story changes after that event.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One also gets to understand the unfairness that school authorities create when they decide for authors what readers can and cannot find in a story. By making his audience see that he was simply depicting the realities of racism, poverty and hunger in a way that children can understand, the author has shown that his choice of the scene was quite in order.

There are many strong and emotionally appealing words and sentences in this essay. The author frequently asks questions such “Should those students be deprived of what I believe is a key scene in order to make a few parents comfortable?” (Mathabane, par 8) or “could Kaffir Boy have had this impact without the prostitution scene” (Mathabane, par 16).

When he talks about his life, he uses phrases such as: “Groaning under the yoke of apartheid” and “sheer agony of frustrated hopes and strangled dreams” (Mathabane, 18). These words cause readers to relate to the gravity of the scene and hence realize its importance.

Mathabane has organized his work on the basis of importance. He first starts with a summary of the article/ scene, then refers to the controversies associated with censorship and goes on to explain why those controversies should be left as they are. At the end he even gives an alternative to censorship. One therefore appreciates the well laid out structure in his work and this also contributes towards the persuasiveness of his article

Work Cited Mathabane, Mark. “If You Assign My Book, Don’t Censor it.” Washington Post, 28 Nov. 1999. Web.


The Al-Qaida Terrorist Group’s Recent Happenings Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Al-Qaida terrorism group is one of the terrorist networks in the world that has been tormenting the planet in the 21st century. In fact, this particular terrorist group is one of its kinds since they seem to be on their own league based on their ruthless and deadly attacking styles. Their wide based group and fearless activities have made the world power countries such US among others to develop high security system in order to deal with the group’s activities because they are seemingly becoming dynamic and more aggressive as the time pass.

In this paper, we shall elaborate the recent happenings of the Al-Qaida terrorist group as broadcasted by the mass media in order to have a better understanding of how they have caused security threat to the world. Moreover, the paper shall discuss the numerous lessons we can be able to learn through observing the activities of this deadly terrorist group.

Discussion In the recent past, the activities of Al-Qaida terrorist group have commonly been highlighted regularly causing its activities to be in the list of focus among various the mass media especially in the TV and Radio, cable TV, the print media and the internet. The internet has particularly played a major role in distributing the news about this terrorist group.

For this reason, I have also been able to have a complete follow up about the various activities of this group from my home. Due to globalization the massive and deadly activities of the Al-Qaida terrorist network has been known to every one around the globe. The following paragraph will highlight on the activities of Al-Qaida network which I have been following in the media.

The year 2011 is time in the calendar that will always be remembered by the Al-Qaida terrorist network group since it marks the death of its founder and leader Osama Bin Laden. In May 2 this year, Osama Bin Laden was killed by the US force after he had been on the hunt for the last one decade due to his negative motives and massive killing in various countries around the world.

Following his death the Al-Qaida group has been very cautious and this particular action by the US force has triggered the group to make necessary changes in order to have a dynamic attacks. Immediately, after the death of Osama Bin Laden, the group held an election in which the group appointed a new leader who will spear head all their future activities. There after, following the group pronouncing a new leader, US forces have also expanded their activities in hunting the new leader in order to ensure that the group does not rise again.

Conclusion By observing on the various events and happenings of Al-Qaida terrorist group, it is quite clear that the group is such a security threat to the world and therefore it is our responsibility to report any suspicious activity because the group is so vibrant and extensive whose aim is only to destroy innocent lives.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This event is a lesson to other people of the similar motive, the news of death of Osama Bin Laden should be a wake-up call to them and therefore they should understand that security has been tightened around the world in this era of technological advancement hence their activities have no chance. The best lesson of all is that, crime and violence does not pay, the end product is death.


Sociological interpretation of the film Made in America Essay college essay help near me

Launched on May 28 1993, Made in America is a fascinating must-watch piece directed by Richard Benjamin featuring Sarah, (Whoopi Goldberg) and Hal (Ted Danson) as its lead characters. The celluloid provides a simple storyline based on the discovery by Zora (Nia Long) that she was conceived through artificial insemination.

The rest of the story unfolds in a comic tone with an even more unsettling discovery for Sarah that the sperm donor was a white male, who was not so partial to intelligence, an outright contradiction to the qualities she requested for in a donor. Several sociological concepts are evident in this production, among them ethnicity, stratification, and gender as the paper tables.

For instance, the situation unveiled in the movie concerning Sarah’s outrageous outburst when she realizes that the father of her child is white is a manifestation of ethnicity. At first, the viewer is led to the assumption that she is being racist, which is true to a limited extent, but in the ensuing scenes, the comical sentiments that are passed back and forth are more ‘racial’ inclined than purely ‘racist’, which would have been discriminatory.

Sarah is an intelligent African-American antiques seller who has managed single-handedly to raise a 20-year-old daughter. She is a tough woman. On the other hand, Hal is a sleazy car sales-man, who disregards intellect and uses his charm to get by. These two characters display stratification in society.

Sarah is an independent single woman doing her best to get by and raise a daughter right. This pressurizes her to succeed as well as live by a certain moral code. On the other hand, Hal is a car-salesman who does not seem to b having any major responsibilities in life. He has a wife who is never in the picture and his life seems to be present-oriented.

The film further addresses the prevailing subject of sexuality. The film seems heavy-laden with bawdy jokes and sexual tension between Sarah and Hal. Moreover, the foundational concept of artificial insemination for conception is a contemporary sexual-related theme. It is more of a controversy to the society’s accepted norms.

The viewer is led to analyze this method of beginning a family, and the ensuing complications give an insight to this method’s probable side effects. However, when combined with the beauty of the existence of Zora, the method’s result, a holistic picture is drawn for viewers to weigh its pros and cons. The jokes and lightheartedness throughout the film may make viewers more receptive of this method of conception.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nevertheless, a confounding element of this concept is the ‘reunion’ or ‘attraction’ between Sarah and Hal. This leaves the viewer questioning the necessity of artificial insemination, whereas natural conception could still have occurred had the two characters met two decades ago. This new projection further sheds light onto the undertones of the film, especially the question of ethnicity.

The director may have wanted to highlight the fact that the present sociological climate was different from that of twenty years ago, and that in this generation, the society was more receptive interethnic liaisons than it was before. This film depicts sociological concepts such as norms, sexuality, stratification, and ethnicity. It triggers its audience to analyze their standing on critical societal values or standards by displaying both the positive and negative characteristics of either standing.


Why the Reconstruction after the Civil War Was a Failure Essay cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction The success or the failure of the implementation of a national policy is normally subject to contention. However, the fundamental consent is that if the prime objectives of its implementation are not met, then it is ultimately considered a failure. The reconstruction era refers to the period following the civil war whereby the numerous different affiliations in the government intended to find a solution to the socio-economic and political problems imposed by the civil war, which was characterized by intense disarray and disorder in the government.

The whites from the south opposed all aspects of equality, while blacks were after complete liberty and their own land in the United States, which resulted to riots. The reconstruction era is arguably one of the most divisive periods in the history of the United States and took place during 1865-1877[1].

Many people are of the opinion that the failure of the reconstruction after the civil war can be significantly attributed to black politics, which was commonly referred as Negro government. Foner notes that paradoxically, racism diminished due to the Northern Democratic Appeal. This paper discusses why the reconstruction after the civil war is considered a failure.

The most probable cause of the failure of the reconstruction following the civil war is black legislatures. The court’s intervention also played a significant role in ensuring that the reconstruction of the south failed in the realization of its goals and objectives. Foner is of the opinion that the court was initially reluctant in attempting to solve the controversies associated with the reconstruction.

In addition, the compromise of 1877 can be perceived to be a solution to the disputed presidential election of 1877 played an important role in ending the reconstruction era after the civil war. The banks also had a role in accelerating the failure of the reconstruction of the south after the civil war. This arguably evident by the fact that the Freedman’s Savings bank held large sums of the black’s money, lacking even the money to give to its depositors.

The Freedman’s Savings Bank operations came to a halt. The reduction of the prices of the crops was also a significant contributor to the failure of the reconstruction of the south, because most of the farmers could make a decent living out of their earnings. The depression had adverse effects on commerce and the economic situation, which significantly impaired social mobility for the blacks[2].

The reconstruction of the south under the administration of President Lincoln and Johnson are major indicators of the difficulties that were inherent in the quest to reshape the South following the civil war.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There was lack of vision in the north concern the state of south after the civil war, there were intense disputes that existed among the Congress and Presidency with respect to the lines of authority and the fact the southern whites were not willing to offer blacks a significant power position are major indicators of the failure of the reconstruction of the South.

The initial plan of approach the reconstruction of the south appeared to be plausible; however, during the cause of its development, it become ultimately evident that the problems that the southerners were facing were not being solved due to the extreme laws and the ongoing malice not in favor of the previous confederates. The peak of this was when the Comprehensive Amnesty Act was passed by the congress, and was used in the restoration of the full rights of the supporters of the confederates[3].

Over the course of the reconstruction era, states in the south started to elect the Democrats back to power, which served to displace the “carpetbagger governments and inflicting a spirit of fear within the blacks not to vote. By the onset of 1876, the republicans only had three states in the South. At this time, warfare was still an imminent characteristic of the south, which was fostered by the deficit imposed by the mediocre government and depraved by 10-year duration of racial warfare.

It is unfortunate that the internal racial policy was elevated from one position to another. Irrespective of the fact that it condoned severe punishments for any forms of discrimination from the white leaders in the south, it only served to increase the degrading forms of racial discrimination directed at the blacks. The late 19 century saw the prevalence of the Jim Crows laws within the states in south, which only served to promote segregation through the restriction of the blacks from gaining admittance to the various civic facilities[4].

Conclusion The basic inference from the above is that the reconstruction of the south was a failure because its objectives were not achieved. This is because there was no commitment from the executive government, no adequate funding for long-term policies to prevent racial violence. In addition, there was fear from the white population concerning the outcomes of equity and the failure of the court intervention to maintain the amendments in the United States Constitution.

Bibliography Foner, Eric. History, Give Me Liberty!: An American. New York: W. W. Norton


Ludwig van Beethoven Term Paper college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Life and Work of Beethoven

Bonn’s Influence on Beethoven

Influencers of Beethoven beyond Bonn

Difficulties in Beethoven’s Mature Career



Introduction Ludwig van Beethoven was a German composer of the transitional period (Solomon, 1998). Beethoven was born on 17 December 1770 in Cologne, Germany and died on 26 March 1827 in Vienna, Austria (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011). History judges Beethoven as the greatest composer to have ever lived. This unmatched praise comes out of the fact that Beethoven dominated the musical history of his time in an extraordinary manner.

Beethoven conveyed the philosophy of life through his music compositions. Historically, Beethoven’s composition borrows attributes from the Classical era composers like Haydn and Mozart. Moreover, Beethoven’s art extends a spirit of humanism and incipient nationalism that had just surfaced at the end of the Classical period (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

The humanism and incipient nationalism theme is visible in the works of other composers like Goethe and Friedrich von Schiller both from Germany (Mai, 2007). Other than extending the theme of humanism and incipient nationalism, Beethoven also radically changed morality as portrayed by Kant (Mai, 2007). Furthermore, he also changed the ideals of the French revolution, extending an emphasis on the importance of a passionate concern for the observance of individual freedom and dignity (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Some of Beethoven’s compositions strongly assert the human will. Beethoven was not a Romantic composer; however, there are characteristics in his works that indicate his influential role on how the works of the Romantics turned out. According to Beethoven, music embodied more emotions than a painting would do. Therefore, he explored all the available scopes of compositions that he could.

The result of this endeavor was an overall expansion of the various scopes such as sonata, symphony, quartet and concerto (Ludwig van Beethoven’s biography, n.d). His attempts were the first for any composer and therefore Beethoven is arguably the innovator. Another important innovation credited to his name was the first combination of vocal and instrumental music (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Another first for Beethoven was his struggle against life’s disadvantages and the fact that he literally lived from the proceeds of his music without having to do composition when he did not feel like doing them. In this regard, it is worthwhile to observe that Beethoven suffered from an encroaching deafness condition, and most of his notable compositions occurred during his last 10 years of living when he could practically not hear.

Beethoven sold his works and offered them commercially for publication. Other than that, he received regular payments pegged only on his compositions. Thus, Beethoven saw no need to engage in other economic activities to sustain him.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Life and Work of Beethoven Beethoven comes from a family of singers. Notably, his grandfather settled in Bonn and sung at the choir of the archbishop-elector of Cologne (Ludwig van Beethoven’s biography, n.d). Moreover, Beethoven’s father also followed the example of his grandfather and sung at the electoral choir. The tale of Beethoven is not unique; it is common for children to pursue similar professions with their parents.

However, even though Beethoven seemingly had an easy start in music having his family’s approval, material support did not come easily. He was born in a well to do family that later become gradually poor. Poverty of the family started with the death of Beethoven’s grandfather and was accelerated by his father plunge into alcoholism (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

This poverty consequence must have had the harshest effect on Beethoven. He was forced to leave formal schooling at the age of 11 and assumed the responsibilities of feeding his family soon afterwards when he became 18 years old (Mai, 2007).

Bonn’s Influence on Beethoven Much of the success of Beethoven musically came after he reached his adolescence. Before reaching puberty, his father really wanted him to turn into a child prodigy like Mozart without success. This came after Johann, his father, noted that Beethoven was quickly grasping his way around the piano (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Another contributor to Beethoven’s development of his music career came from the political decisions of the ruler of Bonn. As Beethoven grew up, Bonn, his hometown, was transformed into a cultural capital city by Maximilian Francis who was a brother to Joseph II the ruler of the Holy Roman Empire from 1780 (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

It was not as a surprise to anyone that the new ruler transformed the once sleepy town into a culturally vibrant city. Most notable is the ruler’s decision to limit the power of the clergy and the creation of a new university in Bonn. These two developments attracted notable literature contributors of the time because of its suitable conditions for literary works (Mai, 2007).

During this transformational Bonn city, the Christian Gottlob named Neefe, a protestant, as its organist. Neefe later interacted with Beethoven and became his teacher. Neefe was not a renowned musician; in fact, he was most influential to Beethoven in the shaping up of his ideals rather than in his music compositions. Nevertheless, Beethoven communicated his emotions through his music. Neefe become instrumental in assisting Beethoven to publish his first surviving composition.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Ludwig van Beethoven specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Neefe was a man of high ideals and wide culture, coupled with immense experience in letter writing, composition of songs and light theoretical pieces. This capacity enabled him to assist in the publication of Beethoven’s first work in 1793. During this time, Beethoven had worked for Neefe for almost a year, serving in the capacity of an assistant court organist.

A major break for Beethoven, which would be much celebrated by Johann, his father, given the amount of attention he had offered in coaching him as a child, came in 1787. After the publication of his first composition, Beethoven became relatively known and was appointed the continuo player to the Bonn opera (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011). Later on in 1787, the archbishop-elector, Maximilian Francis decided to reward the extraordinary talent of Beethoven for the benefit of the whole city’s cultural progress.

He sent Beethoven to the same university as Mozart in Vienna. Unfortunately, Beethoven could not complete his studies after the death of his mother. However, for the brief moment that he was in Vienna, he managed to convince Mozart that his ability to improvise would make him a great name in the world of music (Morris, 2005).

While back at Bonn for five years that followed his leave from Vienna, Beethoven assumed more duties playing at the theatre orchestra and started making worthy acquaintances. At first, he became a teacher of four children of a former Bonn chancellor (Solomon, 1998). Out of this arrangement, the new job presented him with a friendlier home than his own.

In addition, from the association with the chancellor’s four children, Beethoven was able to get more wealthy pupils for his class. Furthermore, out of favorable circumstances, Beethoven happened to play at the Breuning circle. During his performance, part of the audience was Waldstein, a member of the highest Viennese aristocracy (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011). Waldstein was a music lover (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Walden’s admiration for Beethoven’s work led him to extend exclusive invitations to Beethoven to perform at high society functions such as the funeral of Joseph II, the Holy Roman Empire’s ruler. However, his compositions were not performed at the funeral as players found some sections too complicated to grasp under a short practice time (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Later in the 19th century, discovery of the manuscripts by Beethoven led to their first even known performance (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011). Before that, a renowned composer, Haydn, was impressed by the composition and took Beethoven as his pupil (Solomon, 1998). In 1792, Beethoven left Bonn during the French Revolution and never went back.

Genuine students of Beethoven hold great value to his works composed while he still lived in Bonn than those he composed while in Vienna. A major contributing fact to this observance is that at Bonn, Beethoven had a more severe clash with life’s experiences that made his emotions so deep thus making his compositions quite rich and attractive to the students of his music. His compositions done while he was in Bonn embody his struggles to get used to his inadequate training and natural difficulties (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ludwig van Beethoven by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Out of Bonn, Beethoven most notable influence was in his use of sudden pianos; unexpected outbursts and wide leaping arpeggio, having concluding explosive impact that later become known as the Mannheim rockets. After his departure from Bonn, the general style of Bonn changed into a preoccupation with extremes of soft and loud played in contradiction to the musical phrasing (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Influencers of Beethoven beyond Bonn Most notable influences for Beethoven musically were the popular music and folk music of his time. An examination of Beethoven’s mature music reveals instances of major influences from heavy Rhineland dance rhythms. Other than that, Beethoven assimilated idioms from Italian, French, Slavic and Celtic.

Beethoven’s work shows a mild disregard for the harmonic procedure of folk melody. Beethoven also had an impingement from French music through his strong links with its capital Paris. From the Bonn national theatre, Beethoven also found French inspirations because it relied on repertories translated from French. Beethoven’s work shows a favor for the forward march of the French Revolution because of the sympathy that Bonn had for the French Revolution (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

Beethoven grew with the piano teachings of Carl Philipp Emanuel Bach who was the head of the expression music during its period as a major influence. The intellectual climate that raised Beethoven contributed to his ready acceptance and improvisation of the piano teaching more than other notable composers, such as Mozart and Haydn, did (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

During this period, music was viewed as an assortment of feelings. While Neefe, Beethoven’s master, valued feelings in theory, Beethoven saw feelings in their practicality of everyday life. Perhaps that is the reason why some scholars identify his music as Romantic (Morris, 2005).

It would be expected that Beethoven would compose a lot of music based on solo performance because of the fact that his father and grandfathers were singers. However, Beethoven moves radically from this notion instead, favoring plural voice. Beethoven varied major themes of his time and presented them in a plural voice such that this feature became a recognizable attribute of his piano technique. His radically approach came from the view of compositions as the works of an artist rather than a musician (Solomon, 1998).

While in Bonn, Beethoven had become a piano dazzling. He was a prodigy at extemporization surpassing Mozart. Beethoven moved audiences to their tears with so much ease comparable to other great pianists of his time. The aristocracies of Vienna were moved by this power and readily took him immediately when he moved to Vienna. The acceptance by the aristocracy made his music a favorite pastime for the whole of Vienna (Ludwig van Beethoven, 2011).

While in Vienna, Beethoven had another secret teacher in Vienna because he had more difficulties to deal with than Haydn could handle. Antonio Salieri was one of the secret teachers of Beethoven, he taught him vocal compositions (Morris, 2005). In 1795, Beethoven had his first public performance in Vienna. During this time, he also participated in a benefit concert for Haydn who had since moved to London. As the century ended so did Beethoven’s first part of his life, marked by his unfortunate problem of deafness (Mai, 2007).

Difficulties in Beethoven’s Mature Career Many people wonder how Beethoven who was already known as a great a musician and composer would function musically without a hearing ability. During this period, Bonn appears as having a huge importance allocation by Beethoven because the first persons he confides in, about his condition, are from Bonn (Ludwig van Beethoven’s biography, n.d.).

When the deafness became acute, Beethoven started using notebooks to interact with his visitors and most notable were his responses in written form. Beethoven resolved to rise above the difficulties presented by his deafness. However, he was very bitter of the loss of hearing. According to Beethoven’s accounts of his deafness, the cause was his treatment for a stomach condition (Ludwig van Beethoven’s biography, n.d).

Doctors advised him to have cold baths, which greatly improved his wretched belly condition; however, the treatment came at the expense of his ear problem, which got worse with every additional cold bath. Beethoven noted that winter baths had the most horrible effect such that he had to seek additional medication to address the problem of his ear. Notable, he wrote that his ears sung and buzzed constantly (Ludwig van Beethoven’s biography, n.d.).

As a mature composer, Beethoven was very anxious of monetary compensation attributable to the fact that he had no other income source other than his music (Mai, 2007). The instance of going deaf and having little money to live on pushed Beethoven into depression.

What pushed him beyond his struggle were his personality and the fact that he considered himself as an artist more than a composer (Solomon, 1998). Thus, his outlook of life and music came from an intellectual engagement in his mind. Even the expression of emotions in his music had to be channeled through carefully crafted thoughts (Solomon, 1998).

Conclusion This essay has demonstrated beyond doubt why Ludwig van Beethoven is a respected and renowned composer. Moreover, it presents a deeper look at the major influencing factors of his career such as his health condition. The reader would appreciate Beethoven as a genius by looking at his struggles, how he used his limited but critical opportunities to further his career. Lastly, this essay presents a critical link to understanding Beethoven; that of an artist and a musician.

References Johann Georg Albrechtsberger. (2011). Web.

Ludwig van Beethoven. (2011). Web.

Ludwig van Beethoven’s biography. (n.d.). Web.

Mai, F. M. (2007). Diagnosing Genius: The Life and Death of Beethoven. Montreal: McGill-McQueen’s University Press.

Morris, E. (2005). Beethoven, the universal composer. New York: HarperCollins Publishers.

Solomon, M. (1998). Beethoven (2nd ed.). New York, NY: Prentice Hall International .


The Baroque Era Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Overview

The Baroque Era and music style (1600-1750)


Baroque era and the composers

Major periods in Baroques era



Overview Baroque era (1600-1750) refers to time period in European history when musicians composed and performed certain typical style of music (Winterer, 2005). Initially, the term Baroque was largely used in Portugal. In spite of the fact that it later surfaced as an important development in music, original interpretation of the term was rather derogatory. For instance, it was used to imply extravagancy, abnormality or some form of strangely composed art. Later, the term was changed to denote a historical period in music.

Unlike other styles of music that were in Europe prior to 1600 C.E., Baroque style was characterized by intense, lavishly texturized and highly ornate music. Besides, melodic lyrics that were played during Baroque era were highly decorated and had rich counterpoints (Vaubel, 2005). Apparently, this attracted huge following due to appealing nature of the music itself.

This musical era carried with it beliefs and characteristics such as those of the doctrine of affection that allowed composition of songs which expressed emotions of the composer. Additionally, in this era, unlike the Renaissance era, the music style emphasized elements such as pace, texture and contrast in volume (Winterer, 2005).

Research studies indicate that style of music that was played during the early Renaissance and the medieval periods were harsh and lacked decorations such as instruments and vocal colors. Music in Baroque era was characterized by abundant use of instruments, voice colors and liturgical music styles. During this time, secular music had gained fame.

It is imperative to note that besides secular music, other styles that were gaining rapid acceptance during that period were homophonic and polyphonic styles (Locke, 2007). The latter was used by instrumentalists and composers to write and play more than one line of music. Homophonic music technique separated accompaniment that was playing from the melody lines. These lines were later on supported by harmony from bass instruments such as a cello or a bassoon and a harpsichord.

During this period, it is worth mentioning that there were other forms of music that were developing simultaneously with homophonic music. Additionally, the artistry in counterpoint that was popular during the renaissance period spread into Baroque era (Winterer, 2005).

Composers were using art to compose polyphonic music such as the fugues and the cannons which were imitative of counterpoints. In the period around 1600, orchestra and opera music began (Morazzoni, 2005). Opera was important in Baroque era since it played a key role in Greek drama shows.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Intellectuals from Italy were interested in ancient Greek drama and therefore, they depended on opera music to recapture its spirit. Opera music blended well with homophonic music style by using poetic melody to attract concentration of listeners. It was during Baroque era that orchestra evolved. It came from a combination of vocal and operatic music. The first great opera music in that era was called Orfeo which was played by Claudio Monteverdi in 1607 (Locke, 2007).

The most popular style of music that was played in mid 1600s was concerto. Unlike orchestra which was unique in style, concerto had a contrast of volume and texture that made it so interesting. Besides, its distinguishing features from orchestra included an ensemble of soloists or a solo instrumentalist. It was during the baroque period that natural phenomena and human spirits were incorporated in music composed (Winterer, 2005). This essay explores styles of music that were used during Baroque Era.

The Baroque Era and music style (1600-1750) The period covered by Baroque era began from 1600 C.E. It commenced with the birth of opera. During the initial stages of development, by Monteverdi to and ended with the death of Handel and Bach in the 1750’s. Conservatives believe that Baroque era sprang from Renaissance era that lasted between 1400 to 1600 C.E. The music style that characterized this era was conceptually grandiose with a design that was elaborately ornate. It followed Baroque’s literature and music arts which displayed tension, energy and movement.

The music played in this era was conscious of style in the sense that words were used to describe picture and intellectual knowledge. Richer vocabulary characterized music and played the role of expressing extreme affections (Friesen, 2010). Needless to say, music classification played during this era was There were other forms of art besides music. Such arts included painting, sculpture and architecture.

The music played in this era was different from that which was played during the Renaissance period. It had tonalities such as minors and majors, and titles that indicated the centers of the tones and forms such as D Minor for fugue and toccata, A Major for orchestra and violin used in concerto. These replaced the modalities that were in the Renaissance style. Besides, the modal cadences were replaced by authentic cadences.

The birth of opera was a fulfillment of extreme affections in Baroques music. Melodic freedom was shown by the way musicians displayed their emotions. It is imperative to note that, music in that era moved the hearts of listeners, composers and instrumentalists and caused them to freely express their emotions. It was during this time that the modal system of Renaissance period was replaced by tonal system of Baroque era (Locke, 2007).

Research studies indicate that the stile antico music, famously known as enaissance music, required academic training to gain singing and composing skills. Music style in Baroque era had new concepts that did not require training. It was a different concept from that which existed in the Renaissance era. Learning how to express words and emotions in that new concept was spontaneous. Musicians and composers doing secular and church music in Baroque era mixed stile moderno with stile antico to make it interesting.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Baroque Era specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The counterpoint art that had dominated Renaissance period crossed into Baroque era and reached its paramount after being oriented harmonically by Bach. During this time, Baroque’s music was considered contrapuntal (Locke, 2007). However, Baroque music took a new turn and adopted new styles such as Basso Continuo and Stile Concertato.

With these styles, a keyboard and a bassoon were used to play music. The harmony was filled in with the keyboard while the written parts were played using the bassoon, cello or the viola da gamba (Vaubel, 2005). Stile Concerto involved a concept whereby an ensemble and a group of performers played music in opposition (Friesen, 2010).

Baroque era marked the first time in history where dynamics and tempo were used in music. Tempo involved styles such as presto and allegro while piano and forte formed the dynamics (Locke, 2007). Additionally, musicians in this period increased their skills and techniques in identifying figured bass parts, cadenzas, ornamentations and, variations in melodies. It was in this period that new musical styles were formed.

Those styles included cantata, oratorio, suite and opera. Others in this category included sonata, concerto, toccata, passacaglia, chaconne and fugue. Many composers used styles that displayed contrasting elements such as concertanto. Moreover, research studies indicate that the music played during this era embraced the use of idioms. After 1600 C.E. many songs that were composed developed idioms from the main instruments (Morazzoni, 2005).

Music was composed for a particular instrument. Initially, and in the era that preceded Baroque, songs were composed for any instrument. During that time, instrumental and vocal music formed the centre of music since the church dominated. Stile moderno gave way to new and differentiated ideas whereby composers doing instrumental writing borrowed vocal styles and idioms (Vaubel, 2005).

The stages through which Baroque music developed were many bearing in mind that it was a long era coupled with serial development in music of a particular style. It is also imperative to note that during this era in the development of music, several types of both composing and singing style s were used to produce high quality of music that the entire society could appreciate. As already mentioned, use of musical accompaniments was a common experience during this era.

This was found to be necessary especially due to the fact that there was need to blend every piece of production in order to match with the dynamic needs of the society. Moreover, Baroque era was not merely associated with simple playing of music but w as also laced with live stage managed concerts.

The use of tempo and dynamic s was a common experience among music composers and singers during this historic era. A case ex ample was the use of ornaments as well as special ornaments during music concerts. These w ere found to appeal to greater majority of music lover. Indeed, it is definite that mixed expressions were common experience in the type of music played during this time.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Baroque Era by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Tempo Before 1600, notations were used to indicate the tempos of traditional songs. Most of the songs had fairly equal tempos. During the Baroque period, composers began composing songs that varied in tempo.

Unlike the traditional way of using notations to determine variance in tempo, composers in Baroque period used terms such as Vivacissimo, Ralletando, pretissimo and poco a poco to indicate tempo (Morazzoni, 2005). These Italian words, which were later used to express convectional tempo, were initially used in Italy and later spread in other parts of Europe.

Even though on one hand, these terms caused confusion to composers due to their strangeness, on the other hand, they were helpful to composers who needed to interpret their musical works. For instance, a moderate tempo would be termed as andante, an Italian word for walking. This term would fall between adagio which means slow tempo and moderato which stands for moderate speed (Friesen, 2010).

Others include Meno and Lento that means less and slow respectively. The terms can be used together to mean a different kind of tempo. For example, meno andante would mean a slightly faster tempo. During this era, metronomes were invented. Metronomes were used by composers to mark music tempos. Most performers and conductors preferred using metronomes in tempo markings since they were precise (Yudkin, 2010).

Baroque era and the composers During the baroque era, a number of composers composed songs of different styles. Some of the prominent composers included the master of Baroque opera called Claudio Monteverdi, Georg Philipp Telemann – a prolific and versatile instrumentalist and composer from German, Domenico Scarlatti- a developer of classical music during Baroque era, Jean-Philippe Rameau-a harpsichord music composer from France, Henry Purcell- a string music composer, and Johann Pachelbel- a chamber, choral and organ music composer (Vaubel, 2005).

This individual was famous during this era for his combining D Major in Basso Continuo and 3 violins while playing his compositions of Gigue and Canon (Morazzoni, 2005). Others include an English composer of stringed music called Mathew Locke, lute music composer from France- Denis Gaultier, organ music players- Jose Elias and Francois Couperin, and Arcangelo Corelli among others.

Major periods in Baroques era Baroque era and music styles were divided into early middle and late periods. The latter covered a period between 1680-1750 while the middle age the period between 1630 and 1680. The earlier period 1600-1630 was characterized by recitative-free rhythms and counterpoint styles (Vaubel, 2005).

Composers preferred applying different styles in their music to the old fashioned concerto and recitative styles. It was after this period that composers developed a desire to create harmony and dissonance in their compositions (Morazzoni, 2005). This was for the purpose of overcoming small scale kind of music lacked progress. They felt the need to introduce instrumental combinations, new vocals, recitatives, monody, dissonance and chromaticism.

This caused the abandonment continuity that characterized melodies and rhythms. In their place, discontinuity, a distinguishing characteristic between Baroque and renaissance was introduced. It was rhapsodic in rhythm, harmony and melody. An example of a discontinuous rhythm and harmony was the monadic madrigals of Peri and Caccini (Friesen, 2010).

Opera and Cantanta styles found in bel-canto dominated the middle period. During this time, composers reinstituted contrapuntal texture. These brought growth in musical forms. Tones were introduced and minor and major chords were used to replace modes. The period 1680-1750 saw complete institution of tonality in Baroque’s music styles (Friesen, 2010). Sonata, concerto and aria styles grew to full dimensions and instrumental music dominated.

Conclusion In summing up, it is imperative to note that the style of music during Baroque era and especially towards the late period was largely characterized by exuberance and ecstasy. As aforementioned, the style of music that was embraced during this era could best be described as intense, lavishly texturized and highly ornate form of music.

Besides, melodic lines of this historical music that were played during Baroque era were highly decorated and had rich counterpoints. As noted in the literature review, there were instances when music style in baroque era was blended by the church with that of Renaissance period.

This increased the much desired taste and preference in music. Additionally, it is important to note that the three major periods of music style during Baroque era were influenced by individual national styles. Some of the nations that historically embraced this form of music included Italy and France.

For instance, the former introduced Italian genres such as sonata. The Italian sonata was later used to express convectional tempo. It was initially used in Italy and later embraced in other parts of Europe. France introduced the ballet as well as French horn.

References Friesen, E. (2010). “Great music and the spell of cinema”. Queen’s Quarterly, 117(2), 286-297. Locke, R. (2007). “A Broader View of Musical Exoticism”. The Journal of Musicology, 24(4), 477-521. Morazzoni, A. M. (2005). “Challenging wisdom”. European Journal of Information Systems: Special issue: personal reflections on Claudio ciborra’s, 14(5), 522- 523. Vaubel, R. (2005). “The role of competition in the rise of Baroque and renaissance music”. Journal of Cultural Economics, 29(4), 277-297. Winterer, C. (2005). “From royal to republican: The classical image in early America”. The Journal of American History, 91(4), 1264-1290. Yudkin, J. (2010). Understanding Music (6TH ed.). Boston: Boston University Press.


Jane Elliot – A Class Divided Analytical Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Background


Teaching method used

Practicality and reasons thereof

Background Discrimination has taken many definitions over the years. However it can basically be said to be a representation of prejudicial treatment to a person for membership in a given category or group. It is the relationship that exists between one group to another and the actual manner in which they treat each other.

It mostly involves restriction denial and withholding of opportunities or access to such opportunities to an individual of a certain category. Such preferential treatment need not cause harm to be discrimination. It is enough to give worse treatment to an individual over another for some pertinent arbitrary reason.

Argument In 1968, Riceville, Iowa teacher, Jane Elliot, watched in horror as Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr. was assassinated. She was greatly concerned at how discrimination was being perpetrated in society with sheer ignorance of the damage and pain it was causing to the discriminated people. In an attempt at passing the message against discrimination to her 3rd grade students she attempted to give a lesson to sensitize the class on the effect of the vice.

However this was an exercise in futility since like their parents and the society around them they did not understand or have a feel of what discrimination was. In fact some of the children only saw black people on the television. The topic as therefore discussed lightly and with ignorance.

She therefore used a practical example of discrimination in which she separated the class into two groups. The first group was made up of children with blue eyes while the other was made of children with brown eyes. She then proceeded to praise the group of children with blue eyes as against those with brown eyes. The children were made to believe that the children with blue eyes were more superior and were more intelligent and therefore deserved to be treated better.

The children with blue eyes were given advantages and privileges over their brown eyed friends such as more time during breaks and more teacher attention. They were also warned against interacting with their fellow brown eyed class mates and they were not to play with them. The brown eyed students were also made to wear blue scarf’s that would be used to identify and distinguish them from other children.

On the second day, the blue eyed children took their turn and were made to wear the scarfs. Jane Elliot altered the mindset to portray the blue eyed students as lazy and rude. They were also made to suffer lesser privileges such as not going to play as well as a single share of lunch as opposed to going for a second share for those who were not satisfied. The brown eyed students were also given more teacher attention and received more congratulatory remarks form their teacher as opposed to their blue eyed classmates

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The response at the end of the two day exercise was exhilarating. The effectiveness of this method in delivering knowledge and affecting the learning process was very good. The children voluntarily condemned the vice of discrimination and gave their feel of the activity. The sense of imprisonment oppression and segregation was deeply felt by the students who when asked to dispose of the blue scarf’s that were used to identify the children who were of a different group choose to tear them up.

This intriguing and aggressive sense of remorse shows how deep discrimination goes in offending the individual or person. The experience as reviewed by the students fourteen years later was a total success in cementing and embedding the principles and values against discrimination. Most of the students grew up to enforce the doctrines and moral of the analogy against discrimination to their wives children friends and fellow members of society. They became bolder at proclaiming their stand against discrimination.

Teaching method used Jane Elliot employed a marriage between collaborative and participatory teaching methods. She allowed the students to facilitate her teaching process while in the process allowing them to teach and learn from each other. Undeniably other teaching methods such as lecturing and explaining would have had little success at accessing the young mind let alone solidify the knowledge amidst the societal approach to the issue.

The method creates an interactive collaboration between the teacher and the student allowing the class to be more practical and realistic. This goes against the grain of most education systems and methods in the contemporary teaching pretext that are more skewed towards an explanatory method of teaching.

Practicality and reasons thereof In the modern day information and technology context the method would face certain pertinent challenges that stream from the structural and situational changes that have occurred in the learning environment. For instance, Students learning through electronic methods have little time for the interpersonal interaction with fellow classmates except in instances where it is absolutely necessary. It would therefore be quite difficult to implement the method in a virtual classroom where students are distantly located.

The method would however still work in the rural and most modern learning environment where there the class room set up still exists. It will however require certain pertinent modification in its manner of delivery and execution to involve more modern concepts and analogies within the method.


The Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution Report scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Abstract The success of every organization depends upon its strategies, and that is why every year a good number of organizations, spend a lot in time, money and effort to create the perfect strategic plan (Syrett, 2007, p. 63). But a successful strategy will not benefit the company much if it is not executed successfully.

Recent studies of companies that have over five hundred million dollars in revenue showed that, more than sixty six percent of them set their targets above nine percent real growth. But unfortunately less than one company in ten of these firms achieves this level of success.

In fact only thirteen percent of them are able to achieve six percent compound annual growth rates and provide their shareholders with returns that exceed their cost of capital. This percentage could be raised if only companies understood the secret of successful strategy execution. This paper explains these secrets to successful strategy execution.

The success of every organization solely relies on how well it executes its strategies. (Syrett, 2007, p. 63). Brilliant strategies can place an organization in the competitive map, but this does not automatically translate into success in this aggressive sector, but on the contrary can it can lead to the organizations downfall. Many companies have excellent strategies but they struggle with their execution since most of them rely on other factors to trigger this implementation.

This reliance is mostly because these organizations do not understand the logistic for implementation of these effective strategies. This lack of understanding is majorly due to fear of the unknown, fear of the consequences, which can only be overcome if theses firms understood the secrets of successful strategy implementation. This paper explains these secrets to successful strategy implementation.

Why Strategies Fail

Before we look at the secrets we need to understand why most strategies fail, despite their brilliance. Strategies that fail are not the bad ones only, the good ones fail too and in most cases it is hard to pinpoint the reasons for their failure.

Failure could result from poor planning and clarification, poor communication, poor alignment and measurement, poor leadership for strategy execution, lack of expertise and experience, poor synchronization, cultural factors, and executive inattention among others. These causes have been explained below:

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Lack of Expertise and Experience

Lack of expertise is mostly predominant in organizations that rely upon newly MBA-trained managers who lack of experience. These managers know a lot about decision making and planning but know very little about carrying out the proposed plans. Despite the fact that these newly trained managers are good and knowledgeable they still have much to learn probably through experience, and this means that they will make a lot of errors in the process.

Poor Synchronization

Poor synchronization is the major reason why executions go wrong, since it allows the main focus of the given strategy to shift with time to a different thing altogether (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5). Poor synchronization leads to deviation from the expected goals, hence failure to achieve the desired plans.


Plans mainly fail due to miscommunication and not communicating them to the right people involved. Sometimes the major strategies are developed and the information is not passed down to the lower levels of management who are responsible for the actual implementation of the strategies. This eventually results into the strategies not being achieved.

Resistance to change

Resistance to change in the organizational structure is another major cause for failure of plans. Resistance to change prevents effective implementation of new strategies and new policies in the organization.

There could be sound reasons for this resistance, like such strategies could only make sense to the high level managers like promoting one brand of a product at the expense of another, but the full impact it will bring to the organization may have not been considered. Another reason could be the fear of loss of employment, loss of market, decline of competitiveness among others.

Cultural Factors

Cultural factors to a greater extent hinder the execution of strategies effectively in any given company. In a number of cases companies, try to execute workable and tested strategies in a given market without realizing that they are operating in a niche that requires a totally different approach than the one they are using.

A good example is when the company moves into a new market environment like a new country and tries to apply the same policies it did with its suppliers in its earlier market. In most instances these new suppliers will not abide to these new policies forcing the company to reevaluate its policies.

We will write a custom Report on The Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Executive inattention

Executive inattention is the biggest factor for failures of strategies, this is because once the plans have been decided upon no little or no follow up is executed to ensure the plan is implemented. To support this fact, recent research on companies show that less than fifteen percent of companies routinely follow up their plans and their five year growth expectations.

Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution Many organization in an attempt to solve the problem of failing strategies, have resorted to extreme measures involving structural changes like reorganization, laying off more workers, employing new managers among other changes (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5). These structural changes unfortunately only achieve short term benefits to the organization, but the problems that it purported to solve soon creeps in.

These factors only prove that the secret to successful strategy does not entirely depend upon the organizational structure but on the contrary depends upon several important factors. These factors include clarification of decision rights, ensuring that information flows to where it is needed, and realigning of incentives to support the strategies made among others (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5).

Apart from these factors the success of organizational strategies also involve the correct application of the four management functions of planning, staffing, organizing, and directing or controlling (Holm, 2007, p. 163).

Decision Rights

To be effective in implementing its strategies the management of the firm should ensure that every worker understand the decisions he is responsible for. The management should also ensure that the higher level managers delegate the operational decisions to the middle level and lower level managers who understand the operations at these subordinate levels (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5).

Information Flow

The firm should facilitate information flow across the organizational boundaries to better manage the relationship between the companies’ various units.

People and Process

The firm should get the right people in place and the right things will be done, and in addition improve executive performance by training and through creating a culture of accountability among the lower level employees.

Getting the Job Done

The organization after doing all the above should employ a series of five steps to get things done. These steps involve the tangible things that the company can do to improve its chances of success through an ongoing process. Theses steps involve:

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Developing a model for the execution of plans that provides a way to conceptualize market leadership goals. This model should be the guiding principle throughout the whole organization.

Keeping the plan center stage, since they are often simple, agreed to, and have a high chance of being forgotten in the long run. The firm can ensure the plan is not forgotten when executive meetings about operations are separated from those about strategies.

Assessing performance frequently from quarterly to monthly or even on weekly terms and ensuring effective communication of the plan to the people involved in carrying it out.

Management Functions

Apart from these steps, the effective execution of strategies relies upon the management’s efficiency in carrying out its four basic functions in line with its strategies. These functions include;


Planning involves chalking out a future plan or course of action and coming up with the most appropriate guidelines to achieve the predetermined goals. In developing strategies the firm should establish a strategic plan where it analyzes its competitive opportunities and threats, its strengths and weaknesses and position itself in a manner that it can compete effectively in its environment. This planning of strategies should be done in line with the organization’s mission which is its sole and major reason for existence.


Organizing is the process of bringing together, the physical, human, and financial resources to develop a productive relationship amongst them for effective achievement of the organizational goals. This function involves developing an organizational structure then employing human resource to ensure accomplishment of company objectives. In this respect the firm should design jobs in its departments in line with its strategies, and that will help it achieve them effectively.


Controlling is the managerial process of checking the advancement of the work in progress against the preset plans to see if they are running in accordance to the goals of the firm.

In this respect the organization has to continually check its performance to ensure it goes on in accordance with its strategies. This can be done through, establishing a standard performance, measuring the actual performance, comparing the actual performance with the set standards and trying to find out if any deviation exists and finally carrying out the corrective action.


Leading involves determining what needs to be done in a given situation and getting the people required to carry it out, to actually perform it. Leading is implemented effectively through, supervision and motivation. In supervision, the work of the subordinates is monitored and regulated to ensure it is in compliance with set plans. In motivation the workers are encouraged to be zealous t for their work by offering them incentives in form of monetary or non monetary terms.

In conclusion, the success of any organization depends upon how effectively they understand and adhere to the secrets of implementing their strategies. An organization can have the best strategies but its success does not depend entirely on them. This is majorly contributed by unexpected shortcomings and prevailing circumstances which can hamper their implementation. The success of every firm’s strategies solely depends upon how the organization will involve all of its departments in adhering to the principles discussed in this paper.

References Holm, M. J. (2007). Strategy execution: passion


Risks and Security in the Wireless Networks Essay writing essay help

Introduction Wireless networks have helped telecommunication organizations and other enterprises avoid the costly installation of cables into buildings to provide the computer network. This has made the network available to many homes in the United States, as well as saving people’s time for physical connection of printers and other devices that can be linked to the home wireless network.

However, this has also made accessing the World Wide Web possible from any point within the router’s ranger and therefore risking having the network used by neighbors. Though much has been done to control such users, such as protecting these networks with passwords, a lot of people find it easy to hack into them and enjoy the free internet while most homes do not even try to protect them.

Discussion It is very unethical to enjoy free internet by using your neighbor’s wireless network. This amounts to stealing. It is just like taping their electricity lines or water pipes secretly. Though most wireless connections are priced periodically, meaning that there will be no extra cost incurred due to a stealing neighbor, this does not justify using the network without the owner’s consent (SANS Institute, 2003). Ethically, one should inform the owner of their network’s range and then request to use it.

This way, the owner will be aware of the users and will protect any confidential information on their personal computers from being shared in the network. It will also be fair to strike a deal to cost share the internet charges. This is because it is very selfish for anybody to wait for their neighbor to pay for their internet connection so that they can enjoy it for free.

It is worse when the owner of the connection has to pay extra charges for the other unknown users. Though this is rear, we should have a culture of respecting everything that does not belong to us. We may think that it does not cost the owner any extra penny for us to use their network, but the truth is it affects their internet speed. Having several users on the same network slows its’ speed and this is not fair to the owner.

It makes the owner unable to download all the data he/she may have wanted or spend a lot of time downloading it. This may cause dissatisfaction by the owner in the service provide yet the mistake is the provider. The owner may even seek alternatives and this will force him or her to spend unnecessary to install new wireless network but so long as the network is not secure, the same problem will arise.

Ethics will prevent us from using other people’s properties even when it does not cost them. It is not a big deal to have their consent first and even if they deny us we should respect that. Unfortunately, most people do not just use the wireless network; they hack into it. According to Zelinsky, Reams


An Analysis Import essay help: essay help

Since 1960, Japan, Britain and U.S.A were recognized as the leading countries in the global economy. However, due to the embracing of technology and lessening of trade barriers, there has been swift economic development in developing nations like China, Singapore, Malaysia, Hong Kong and Taiwan. Currently, these nations are competing fairly with the developed nations with regard to the world output, with prospect predictions depicting that the developing nations are going to dominate the global economy.

Decrease of trade barriers under the General Agreements on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) led to the liberated flow of goods, services and resources between nations. The WTO system was also put in place for argument resolution, enforcement of trade rules and control of levy on manufactured goods, services and agricultural products.

Whereas the lessening of trade barricade made globalization of market and production a hypothetical prospect, technological change made it a solid actuality. Some technological advances included: microprocessors and telecommunications, the World Web and internet, and transport technology. Major progress in connections and information processing decreased the cost of universal communication hence the cost of synchronizing and controlling global organizations.

This research was designed to evaluate current practices across China, Singapore and Malaysia with comparison to the United States and Britain. The results depict that the developing nations, and especially China, are likely to dominate the world output.

Introduction Over the years, there has been a swing towards a more incorporated and interdependent world economy, also known as globalization. Many firms source commodities and services from diverse locations around the world in an attempt to obtain advantage of national disparity in the cost and value of factors of production which include: land, capital, labor and energy, thereby enabling them to race more effectively with there competitors (Hill 24).

As a result, several global institutions have appeared so as to administer, regulate and control the global market place by encouraging the establishment of international treaties to oversee the global business organization. Some examples of international institutions include the World Trade Organization (WTO), World Bank, International Monetary Fund (IMF), and the United Nations (UN).

The two key factors that have encouraged globalization include: lessening trade barriers and technological change. Advancements in transportation technology have facilitated firms to better respond to global client demands. This has led to transformation in the global economy. For instance, in early 1960’s, U.S. subjugated the world economy accounting for almost 40.3% of the world industrialized output.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, by 2005 the U.S. accounted for no more than 20.1%. This was as a product of the swift economic development that was experienced in other states like China, Malaysia and Singapore. Forecasts predict a swift rise in the share of globe output accounted for by developing nations like China, Hong Kong, Singapore and Malaysia and a turn down in developed nations like U.S. and Britain (Hill 32). This forms the rationale for the evaluation of exports and imports practices in these countries.

The paper starts with a definition of the key terms used followed by history of imports and exports, driving and impeding forces, case studies of China, Singapore and Malaysia, suggestions, future trends and finally, a conclusion.

Definition of Terms Globalization: the drift towards a more incorporated economic system.

Globalization of markets: the verity that in various industries historically different and separate markets are integrating into one vast global market place in which the feelings and preferences of customers in different states are beginning to congregate upon some global standard (Rawski 43).

Globalization of production: the propensity among several firms to font goods and services from diverse locations around the world in an effort to take advantage of nationwide discrepancies in the cost and factors of production which include labor, land, energy and capital, thus enabling them to compete more efficiently with their competitors.

Exports: sale of goods and service to a foreign country.

Import: Buying of goods and services from other countries.

We will write a custom Research Paper on An Analysis Import


The Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution Report college essay help near me

Abstract The success of every organization depends upon its strategies, and that is why every year a good number of organizations, spend a lot in time, money and effort to create the perfect strategic plan (Syrett, 2007, p. 63). But a successful strategy will not benefit the company much if it is not executed successfully.

Recent studies of companies that have over five hundred million dollars in revenue showed that, more than sixty six percent of them set their targets above nine percent real growth. But unfortunately less than one company in ten of these firms achieves this level of success.

In fact only thirteen percent of them are able to achieve six percent compound annual growth rates and provide their shareholders with returns that exceed their cost of capital. This percentage could be raised if only companies understood the secret of successful strategy execution. This paper explains these secrets to successful strategy execution.

The success of every organization solely relies on how well it executes its strategies. (Syrett, 2007, p. 63). Brilliant strategies can place an organization in the competitive map, but this does not automatically translate into success in this aggressive sector, but on the contrary can it can lead to the organizations downfall. Many companies have excellent strategies but they struggle with their execution since most of them rely on other factors to trigger this implementation.

This reliance is mostly because these organizations do not understand the logistic for implementation of these effective strategies. This lack of understanding is majorly due to fear of the unknown, fear of the consequences, which can only be overcome if theses firms understood the secrets of successful strategy implementation. This paper explains these secrets to successful strategy implementation.

Why Strategies Fail

Before we look at the secrets we need to understand why most strategies fail, despite their brilliance. Strategies that fail are not the bad ones only, the good ones fail too and in most cases it is hard to pinpoint the reasons for their failure.

Failure could result from poor planning and clarification, poor communication, poor alignment and measurement, poor leadership for strategy execution, lack of expertise and experience, poor synchronization, cultural factors, and executive inattention among others. These causes have been explained below:

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Lack of Expertise and Experience

Lack of expertise is mostly predominant in organizations that rely upon newly MBA-trained managers who lack of experience. These managers know a lot about decision making and planning but know very little about carrying out the proposed plans. Despite the fact that these newly trained managers are good and knowledgeable they still have much to learn probably through experience, and this means that they will make a lot of errors in the process.

Poor Synchronization

Poor synchronization is the major reason why executions go wrong, since it allows the main focus of the given strategy to shift with time to a different thing altogether (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5). Poor synchronization leads to deviation from the expected goals, hence failure to achieve the desired plans.


Plans mainly fail due to miscommunication and not communicating them to the right people involved. Sometimes the major strategies are developed and the information is not passed down to the lower levels of management who are responsible for the actual implementation of the strategies. This eventually results into the strategies not being achieved.

Resistance to change

Resistance to change in the organizational structure is another major cause for failure of plans. Resistance to change prevents effective implementation of new strategies and new policies in the organization.

There could be sound reasons for this resistance, like such strategies could only make sense to the high level managers like promoting one brand of a product at the expense of another, but the full impact it will bring to the organization may have not been considered. Another reason could be the fear of loss of employment, loss of market, decline of competitiveness among others.

Cultural Factors

Cultural factors to a greater extent hinder the execution of strategies effectively in any given company. In a number of cases companies, try to execute workable and tested strategies in a given market without realizing that they are operating in a niche that requires a totally different approach than the one they are using.

A good example is when the company moves into a new market environment like a new country and tries to apply the same policies it did with its suppliers in its earlier market. In most instances these new suppliers will not abide to these new policies forcing the company to reevaluate its policies.

We will write a custom Report on The Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Executive inattention

Executive inattention is the biggest factor for failures of strategies, this is because once the plans have been decided upon no little or no follow up is executed to ensure the plan is implemented. To support this fact, recent research on companies show that less than fifteen percent of companies routinely follow up their plans and their five year growth expectations.

Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution Many organization in an attempt to solve the problem of failing strategies, have resorted to extreme measures involving structural changes like reorganization, laying off more workers, employing new managers among other changes (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5). These structural changes unfortunately only achieve short term benefits to the organization, but the problems that it purported to solve soon creeps in.

These factors only prove that the secret to successful strategy does not entirely depend upon the organizational structure but on the contrary depends upon several important factors. These factors include clarification of decision rights, ensuring that information flows to where it is needed, and realigning of incentives to support the strategies made among others (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5).

Apart from these factors the success of organizational strategies also involve the correct application of the four management functions of planning, staffing, organizing, and directing or controlling (Holm, 2007, p. 163).

Decision Rights

To be effective in implementing its strategies the management of the firm should ensure that every worker understand the decisions he is responsible for. The management should also ensure that the higher level managers delegate the operational decisions to the middle level and lower level managers who understand the operations at these subordinate levels (Neilson, Martin, Powers, 2008, p. 5).

Information Flow

The firm should facilitate information flow across the organizational boundaries to better manage the relationship between the companies’ various units.

People and Process

The firm should get the right people in place and the right things will be done, and in addition improve executive performance by training and through creating a culture of accountability among the lower level employees.

Getting the Job Done

The organization after doing all the above should employ a series of five steps to get things done. These steps involve the tangible things that the company can do to improve its chances of success through an ongoing process. Theses steps involve:

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Secrets to Successful Strategy Execution by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Developing a model for the execution of plans that provides a way to conceptualize market leadership goals. This model should be the guiding principle throughout the whole organization.

Keeping the plan center stage, since they are often simple, agreed to, and have a high chance of being forgotten in the long run. The firm can ensure the plan is not forgotten when executive meetings about operations are separated from those about strategies.

Assessing performance frequently from quarterly to monthly or even on weekly terms and ensuring effective communication of the plan to the people involved in carrying it out.

Management Functions

Apart from these steps, the effective execution of strategies relies upon the management’s efficiency in carrying out its four basic functions in line with its strategies. These functions include;


Planning involves chalking out a future plan or course of action and coming up with the most appropriate guidelines to achieve the predetermined goals. In developing strategies the firm should establish a strategic plan where it analyzes its competitive opportunities and threats, its strengths and weaknesses and position itself in a manner that it can compete effectively in its environment. This planning of strategies should be done in line with the organization’s mission which is its sole and major reason for existence.


Organizing is the process of bringing together, the physical, human, and financial resources to develop a productive relationship amongst them for effective achievement of the organizational goals. This function involves developing an organizational structure then employing human resource to ensure accomplishment of company objectives. In this respect the firm should design jobs in its departments in line with its strategies, and that will help it achieve them effectively.


Controlling is the managerial process of checking the advancement of the work in progress against the preset plans to see if they are running in accordance to the goals of the firm.

In this respect the organization has to continually check its performance to ensure it goes on in accordance with its strategies. This can be done through, establishing a standard performance, measuring the actual performance, comparing the actual performance with the set standards and trying to find out if any deviation exists and finally carrying out the corrective action.


Leading involves determining what needs to be done in a given situation and getting the people required to carry it out, to actually perform it. Leading is implemented effectively through, supervision and motivation. In supervision, the work of the subordinates is monitored and regulated to ensure it is in compliance with set plans. In motivation the workers are encouraged to be zealous t for their work by offering them incentives in form of monetary or non monetary terms.

In conclusion, the success of any organization depends upon how effectively they understand and adhere to the secrets of implementing their strategies. An organization can have the best strategies but its success does not depend entirely on them. This is majorly contributed by unexpected shortcomings and prevailing circumstances which can hamper their implementation. The success of every firm’s strategies solely depends upon how the organization will involve all of its departments in adhering to the principles discussed in this paper.

References Holm, M. J. (2007). Strategy execution: passion


Thinking Government: Conservatism, Liberalism and Socialism in Post World War II Canada Essay argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Post World War II Canada

Hugging the Middle

In the 21st Century


Works Cited

Even in some of the prosperous nations of the world where its citizens enjoy a high standard of living, it is difficult to find people that are generally pleased with the way their politicians governed their nation. This is attributed to the complexity of the problems that political leaders have to deal with as well as the inevitable consequences of trying to manage diverse groups of people with different beliefs, interests and ideas on how to run things.

But there is another reason for the differences in opinion when it comes to governance and state presence; it can be understood through the ideologies that people use to interpret the world around them. Three of the most basic ideologies are: conservatism, socialism and liberalism. In the case of Canada its political leaders and its citizens hope to have a middle-ground and not to sway to extremes.

Conservatism is a strong belief in the capability of the individual. Those who adhere to this ideology believe that the individual is the driving force of social progress (Johnson, p.72). Although others would generally agree to this idea, conservatism is distinguished even further on the basis of how a conservative tend to view the role of the state in his or her life.

In this way of thinking the individual does not only have the right to be free this political ideology also stresses the principle that “every individual should be free to ‘ride to the top of life’; to acquire wealth, prestige, and personal power; and to make use of these acquisitions as he or she deems fit” (Johnson, p.72). At first glance this may seem to be a selfish view of life. Furthermore, it is a highly competitive way to live.

Much is given on individual liberties but when it comes to governance conservatism creates two major implications. First of all there is a disdain for big governments or more specifically the power of the government to interfere in the lives of the citizens.

This leads to the second implication which was summarized by political scientists in the following statement: “nothing can be guaranteed in life and that all individuals are also free to fail, to stumble to the bottom, to find poverty and insignificance if they fail to make the best of the opportunities presented to them” (Johnson, p.72). In other words those who had fallen on hard times should not expect any assistance from the government.

Socialism on the other hand is the belief that society and not the individual should be the center of human interaction (Johnson, p.79). This does not mean that socialists do not value liberty and human rights but in the context of the community. Everyone must work together to attain the common good.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There must also be an equal distribution of wealth and power. It also means that society must allow a central government to coordinate and regulate everything. This means greater role for the state to make an impact in the lives of people. However, this can also mean an over-reliance for government help.

In the case of Canada, the citizens are fortunate to have leaders who were able to steer the nation towards the middle-ground. It is labeled as modern liberalism. According to one commentary modern liberalism is the striving to blend the best of both worlds of conservatism and socialism.

The main goal of liberals is to create a “coherent, balanced, pragmatic, yet principled understanding of socio-economic life and the purpose of government” (Johnson, p.90). When conservatism and socialism were blended together to form modern liberalism it greatly benefited Canada. The positive transformation was evident after the Second World War.

Post World War II Canada David Johnson made a good point when he questioned the lack of enthusiasm with regards to the discussion of Canadian politics when in fact Canadians enjoy a high standard of living compared to the rest of the world.

The said author even expounded on this statement by asserting that, “While we may have more in common with Americans than we usually like to admit, it is generally true that few of use actually desire to live in the United States or believe that the overall living standard in that country is superior to ours” (Johnson, p.28). There is a basis for this conclusion.

Canadians take pride in their health care system – it is a system that is publicly administered and funded (Johnson, p.28). This ensures that all Canadians can have access to top-quality health care regardless if the individual can actually pay for the said medical services.

There are only a few nations in the world that can boast of the same service from the government. Even Canada’s neighbor in the South is currently embroiled in a polarizing debate regarding their health care system. Many Americans are extremely frustrated and dissatisfied with the kind of medical assistance they are receiving from the government. This is especially true for the poor citizens of that country.

We will write a custom Essay on Thinking Government: Conservatism, Liberalism and Socialism in Post World War II Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Healthcare is just the beginning, many Canadians take for granted the fact that their children have access to an effective and efficient education system that allows for primary and secondary education. All of these are financed by the provincial and federal government (Johnson, p.28).

There is more that Canadians can be proud of when it comes to quality education available for Canadian citizens. Consider for instance that a college student that meets the requirements of admission can immediately gain access to a life-enhancing education “with the majority of its costs borne by the state” (Johnson, p.28). There are only a few nations in the world that can make the same claim.

The icing on the cake when it comes to the government funded service is none other than the Canadian welfare system wherein the state contributes to the financial security of its senior citizens. For the working people on the other hand the government has a federal employment insurance programs that takes care of them in the event that they are unemployed.

At the same time the government has established a system wherein that does not only assure of income support but also the creation of job-related initiatives to help the unemployed get back to work.

Furthermore, there is the provincial worker’s compensation system that takes care of employees who were injured while doing their jobs. They can expect to receive compensation for income lost as well as injuries sustained (Johnson, p.28). Canadian citizens who fell on hard times, cannot get a job and do not have a network of support that can help them get back on their feet should be relieved that they can receive basic food, clothing, and shelter so that they would never have to die from hunger and suffer the fate of homeless people.

Hugging the Middle It is important to stay in the middle. The Canadian government and its citizens cannot afford to swing to both extremes. If the government swings towards conservatism then the poor are left to fend for themselves. However, if it swings towards an extreme form of socialism then people are not held responsible for their actions and would demand more assistance from the government without doing their share to become a productive citizen.

Yet even if politicians and their constituents would love to be in the middle, it is clear that in the past decades the government has played a bigger role in Canada. In addition, one can argue that the policies and steps taken by the government seem to lean towards socialism. Consider for instance gun control, human rights legislation, multiculturalism policy, environmental regulation, health and safety regulation, regional equalization, and support for Canadian arts and culture.

These policies and activities point towards the idea that the government is using its resources and its influence to try to bring all citizens towards a better life instead of simply watching on the sidelines and wait for them to develop the means to increase wealth and standard of living.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Thinking Government: Conservatism, Liberalism and Socialism in Post World War II Canada by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The government does not turn a blind eye when people suffer and in fact the government has taken steps to ensure that most of the people are living comfortable lives.

According to another commentary “the state presence is substantial in this country because, in the past, most Canadians have been supportive of a significant development and growth of the state to meet certain needs and wants through the political and governmental process” (Johnson, p.29).

Nevertheless, the heightened participation of the government in Canadian society is something that is not considered to be praiseworthy for many Canadians.

There are those who are not yet satisfied with the improvements made in post World War II Canada. According to political analysts, “The irony here is that, while many Canadians value a wide range of the specific policies and programs provided by Canadian governments and hold high expectations of what the state should be doing to protect and promote the quality of life for themselves and others, these same citizens are critical of … the actual institutions of the state from which they receive these services” (Johnson, p.29).

This however, is a clear indication that Canada is not going towards conservatism or socialism but firmly planted in the middle.

In the 21st Century The issue regarding political ideologies was brought to the fore recently because the Conservatives have won a majority for the first time in 23 years (Coyne, p.1). There are even political scientists who are concerned that the liberal party could no longer mount a decent challenge against the onslaught of conservatism (Whitaker, p.1). It is therefore understandable why people are questioning as to the direction that the country is heading to.

The fear that Canada is going to shift towards conservatism is unsubstantiated. The argument seems to be based on one thing only and that is on the result of the recent triumph of the Conservatives in Parliament. But if one utilizes the usual method to gauge what type of political ideology is being used to run the nation and develop policies in the process then it will reveal that Canada is still in the middle-ground not shifting towards conservatism or socialism.

This can be seen in evaluating what has been done in recent years. This does not require a great deal of work because it is easy to see that the government continues to be the central power in Canadian society. The government continues to play a vital role in the economy and security of this nation. The average Canadian citizen wakes up to the realization that the state has provided basic services that is expensive to maintain and yet the services continue up to this day because the government is still doing its responsibilities.

The health care and education system is still in place and with a generous contribution from the government to ensure that all people are safe, secure and can be assured of assistance if needed. An overview of Canada’s budget for 2011 is also a major confirmation that this country is not yet controlled by elitists and powerful individuals that may see their advantage to prevent the government from establishing regulations for banking and finance.

Going back to the overview of the 2011 budget one can see that the government still plays a dominant role. Consider for instance that there is a proposed low-tax plan to ensure growth. This means that the Canadian government is taking a more pro-active role in reviving the economy. There are also steps made to support job creation (Government of Canada, p.1).

If the political climate has shifted to conservatism then the government would not spend precious resources to help struggling citizens to get back on their feet. On the contrary the Canadian government is busy spending money to enhance the guaranteed income supplement (Government of Canada, p.1). In addition the government continues to invest heavily in innovation, education and training so that Canadians have the necessary skills needed to compete in the marketplace.

Conclusion The overwhelming success of the conservatives in Parliament was a cause for concern for those who believe that the Canadian government must continue to stay in the middle and to bring the best of both worlds and sustain a liberal form of government. The reason for doing so is that there is overwhelming evidence that Canadians are better off if the government continues to provide basic services and actively investing in things that help the average Canadian enjoy a high standard of living.

The shift towards conservatism would mean a significant decrease in spending and less participation of the government when it comes to financing and development of programs that could help those who are struggling form the effects of an economic downturn.

However, there is no substantial proof that the political system has indeed shifted towards the right. Canada continues to benefit from a strong state presence. There seems to be indication that the status quo is about to change.

The recent report regarding the national budget confirms that the government is willing to continue to spend to sustain an enviable health care and education system. Nevertheless, one has to agree that the success of the conservatives in recent years is suggestive that someday they would make their move and change core policies of government but that time has not yet come.

Works Cited Coyne, Andrew. “Finally, time for a real agenda.” Web.

Government of Canada. “Budget in Brief.” Web.

Johnson, David. Thinking Government: public sector management in Canada. Ontario: Broadview Press, Ltd., 2006. Print.

Whitaker, Reg. “Is the government party over?” Web.


The Issue of Motivation in English Second Learners Essay (Article) scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Abstract


Theoretical Reference

Methodology: Implementation of Theory

Results and Discussions


Works Cited

Abstract The paper address the issue of motivation in English Second Learners bearing in mind the fact that motivation is the single most important factor that determines the success of second language learning in the students.

The paper begins by explaining what motivation entails and various theories that can be applied in ESL. The paper then demonstrates that use of motivation theories such as; Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory, Integrative and instrumental motivation, self-efficacy theory and Expectancy Theory, can motivate ESL in public school with favorable results.

Examples of the strategies which have sound theoretical basis that I as a teacher will utilize in order to motivate my students are also given. The paper also highlights the major positive results that will result from implementation of motivation methods in class. Sound motivation is proposed as an effective tool in encouraging high performance in English Second Learners.

Introduction In order to effectively teach students language skills, a teacher must be able to make them interested in the language. In addition, the teacher must be able to maintain their interest in the language. This is a hard task especially if the students do not see the importance of learning the new language.

A teacher has to find means through which to motivate the students to learn the language and eventually have a passion for it. Lins goes ahead and declares that motivation is the single most important factor that determines the success of second language learning in the students (5). With this consideration, this paper will set out to research on various methods that may be used to motivate English Second Learners in a public school.

This article will set out to define motivation and then proceed to highlight various aspects of motivation. A number of motivational theories will be highlighted and the manner in which their usage can be exploited to improve the performance of English learners discussed. The paper shall propose the implementation of various motivational theories as the key to motivating students therefore leading to great success.

Theoretical Reference Before setting out to motivate, we must first of all have a proper understanding of what motivation is. Motivation is defined as a “process of stimulating people to action to accomplish desired goals” (Kondalkar 245).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the second language learning setting, motivation may be defined as the extent to which the learner makes choices about which learning goals to pursue and the effort they are willing to devote to succeed in acquiring second language skills. There are a number of theories of motivation that can be implemented in to motivate English Second learner (ESL).

Arguably the most influential motivational theory is Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory. This theory as proposed by Abraham Maslow states that human needs can be viewed as a hierarch and people are constantly ascending from the lowest to the highest.

Maslow theorizes that when one set of needs is satisfied, it ceases to be a motivator to the individual and without the lower needs being satisfied, it is difficult for an individual to aspire to fulfill the higher level needs. Brown contends that when motivating students, this theory is applicable in the classroom setting since achievement of lower-order needs can pave the way to achieve the higher order needs (74).

Integrative and instrumental motivation as first proposed by Gardner and Lambert continue to be very influential in L2-related research (Brown 74). Integrative motivation is a term used to refer to the scenario where a student learns a language for his/her own personal growth.

An integrative oriented student will learn a language from a desire to integrate successfully into the target language community. Instrumental orientation is related to learning a second language for functional purposes. Lins goes on to define instrumental motivation as “related to the potential pragmatic gains of L2 proficiency such as earning more money or getting a better job” (7).

This is the motivation that was traditionally more strongly linked to successful second language acquisition by a student. Brown takes care to note that both integrative and instrumental motivations are mutually inclusive and while some assume that instrumental orientation is a greater motivation; both orientations are of importance (75).

A social cognitive theory that can be used when addressing motivation is Bandura’s self-efficacy theory. In this theory, Bandura proposes that a person’s attitude and abilities play a crucial way to the way they perceive situations and consequently respond to them (Lins 23). Self efficacy influences the direction and steps that an individual will taken when pursuing their goals.

We will write a custom Article on The Issue of Motivation in English Second Learners specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It influences the amount of effort that is given to certain endeavors and the amount of perseverance that will be exhibited in the face of obstacles and failures. A person with high efficacy will be more motivated to act and succeed in a given task as compared to a person with low efficacy. As such, increasing the self-efficacy of the individual results in higher motivation levels.

Another motivation theory that can be utilized in motivating students is the Expectancy Theory. Chapman and Hopwood state that the expectancy theory as proposed by Vroom assumes that individuals choose intended actions, effort levels and occupations that “maximize their expected pleasure and minimize their expected pain, consistent with hedonism” (120).

Expectancy theory asserts that a person’s individual motivational force is a function of their expectancy. In other words, the probability that one’s effort will result in a first-level outcome will result in the person being motivated to act in a certain manner. Students will be more likely to approach the things which bring about a positive effect such as rewards and avoid the things which result in negative effects.

Methodology: Implementation of Theory Appling motivational strategies that borrow from the theories presented above can bring positive learning effects from the students. Motivational strategies are defined by Dornyei as “those motivational influences that are consciously exerted to achieve some systematic and enduring positive effect”.

The first goal that I shall set out to achieve will be creating a friendly atmosphere in my classroom and establishing a good rapport both between myself and the students and among the students. Hedge asserts that interaction in the classroom helps to create a favorable learning environment and also assists the students to learn from each other (13).

Additionally, this action will play a monumental part in motivating the students since students need to feel like they belong and are appreciated. Brown asserts that the mere feeling of belonging to a class will enable the student to devote full energy to attaining academic success in class (74). Without this feeling of belonging and safety, the student will not have achieved the lower level needs as articulated in Maslow’s hierarchy of needs.

The student will therefore be unlikely to devote their effort to attaining the higher needs of academic attainment. I will therefore endeavor to facilitate an atmosphere which demonstrates that I as the teacher care for the students and other students care about each other too. To facilitate this, I will encourage everyone to be acquainted with each other and to work together in a cooperative mode rather than competing with each other for the sole purpose of better grades.

Another strategy that I shall implement is allowing students the freedom to choose the activity that best suits them. I shall therefore come up with a number of tasks aimed at achieving similar educational goals for the students. This is from a realization that students have varied learning methods and optimal results can be achieved by providing students with varied opportunities in which to select the activity that best suits their unique needs.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Issue of Motivation in English Second Learners by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Hedge reveals that there are differences among learners that affect the learning process and for learning to be most effective, the teacher must take these factors into consideration (16). I will therefore endeavor to present material in a manner that is relevant to each student. By doing this, I will have created a personalized learning process for the students. Dornyei and Csizer state that personalizing the learning process makes the course relevant to the student and is key to promoting development in the classroom (217).

Helping students to develop their confidence will be an essential part of motivation. This is because increased confidence in their abilities will result in increased competence. Cauley, Linder and McMillian declare that “students who feel that they have the competence or power to attain a goal invest more effort and persistence in a task that those who lack it” (34).

Activities which boast the confidence of the students in the language will therefore be of great importance in bringing about excellence in the learning efforts. One way in which students can be assisted to recognized development is by being told so. For some students, past successes may be attributed to luck or help as opposed to personal capability.

Comments from a teacher can help to build efficacy in the student. The reason for this is that the student has faith in the instructor’s opinion since it represents expertise and is taken as an accurate assessment (Madden 412). I will therefore be keen to emphasize on the strengths of the students.

In a practical sense, I will closely monitor the accomplishments and progress made by my students and takes the time to celebrate any victory, no matter how small. My feedback will mostly be positive and this praise will encourage the student to work hard.

I will also make a point to give small tokens in addition to verbal praise. Madden states that receiving of a reward by a student will validate their self-efficacy since the reward is a symbol of positive development (412). By combining performance rewards with proximal goals, I can strengthen goals commitment in my students.

Students do not want to learn something that is useless since they are looking for skills and knowledge that will somehow be beneficial to them in their lives. With this consideration, I will make sure that I always relate the material learnt to the real world. To begin with, I will have each student spell out how they hope to make use of their leant English skills in future.

Having done this, I will ensure that I reconcile each lesson to the interests of the student’s. This will ensure that the student’s perceive the material presented in class as both relevant and important for their lives both in the class setting and outside.

Once motivation has been created, it is important to maintain the same in the students. One of the ways in which I shall achieve this is by using goal-setting methods. Cauley, Linder and McMillian reveal that the effort and resilience shown by an individual is higher in the students who have come up with their own goals than for those who have had their goals stipulated by another person (142).

With this consideration, I shall encourage the students to set their own short-term goals. I shall advice that these goals be both challenging and achievable for the student. In addition to this, I will emphasize on the importance to reach the goals within the set time and offer continuous feedback to the students.

Results and Discussions Dornyei and Csizer declare that “without sufficient motivation, even individuals with the most remarkable abilities cannot accomplish long-term goals, and neither are appropriate curricula and good teaching enough to ensure student achievement” (203). Motivation is therefore not only desirable but mandatory for the success of ESL. One of the reasons why motivation is such a challenging issue is because not all students will be motivated by the same things.

This article has considered that motivating behavior is complicated since individuals have varying value systems. While some students are motivated by a personal drive to succeed, others are motivated by their fellow classmates or even the subject challenges. My methods have taken this into consideration by proposing the use of personalized learning process for the students.

The paper has reiterated the importance of setting goals that are challenging but not too difficult as to cause discouragement. This is because high performance results from clear expectations by the individual. Research indicates that students strive harder if they think it is possible to reach the academic expectations that they are expected to reach.

This is in line with the Expectancy theory as articulated by Vroom. When coming up with assignments for my students, I will make a point to set material that students can succeed in. People do not participate wholeheartedly in activities whose achievement they deem futile. Instead, they choose to engage in activities in which they feel they have a high probability of success.

A challenging issue will be how to deal with tests and assessments which are indispensible for the sake of marking progress. Typically, tests represent to students a means for marking out the achievers and the non-achievers in the classroom. Brown proposes the use of tests and exams as tools for self-diagnosis as opposed to comparisons of one’s performance against a norm (79). With such an approach, students will not be discouraged by tests but will see them as valuable tools for marking progress in their learning

Motivation is important for both the teacher and the students in class. Lack of motivation by the students also affects the teacher in that he/she becomes frustrated and less effective. Having motivated students is therefore desirable both for the success of the students and the effectiveness of the teacher who will be enthusiastic when facing motivated students.

Conclusion This article set out to define motivation and demonstrate how some motivational theories can be utilized so as to obtain a positive learning effect from English Second learner. The paper began by explaining what motivation entails and various theories that can be applied in ESL.

This paper has demonstrated that use of motivation theories such as; Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory, Integrative and instrumental motivation, self-efficacy theory and Expectancy Theory, can motivate ESL in public school with favorable results.

From the various arguments presented in this paper, it is clear that motivation is an integral part in ensuring the successful learning of English Second Learners. Therefore, by utilizing the methods I’ve outlined herein, the motivation of my students to learn English will be raised significantly.

Works Cited Brown, H. D. Teaching by principles: an interactive approach to language pedagogy. 2nd Ed. White Plains: Longman, 2001

Cauley, Klaus., Linder, Francis, and McMIllan, Jones. Educational Psychology 89/90. Guilford, Connecticut: The Dushkin publishing Group, Inc. 1989. Print.

Chapman, Christopher, and Hopwood, Anthony. Handbook of management accounting research, Elsevier. 2007. Print.

Dornyei, Zoltan, and Csizer, Kata. “Ten commandments for motivating language learners: results of an empirical study”. Language Teaching Research 2,3 (1998); pp. 203-229.

Domyei, Zoltan. Motivational Strategies in the Language Classroom. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001. Print.

Hedge, Tricia. Teaching and Learning in the Language Classroom. Oxford: OUP, 2000.

Kondalkar, P. Organization effectiveness and change management, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd. 2002. Print.

Lins, Tanja. Motivation and Second Language Learning. GRIN Verlag, 2007. Print.

Madden, Lowell. “Motivating Students to Learn Better Through own Goal-Setting”. Education Vol. 117 No.3. 2004.


Evaluating sales performance Essay essay help online

Introduction Sales Force Automation primarily involves the use of software modules for streamlining all the activities pertaining to sales and to aid in the reduction of time that sales representatives need to spend on each of the steps of the sales process.

The basic implication of this is that it allows business enterprises to make use of few sales representatives for the purposes of management of their customers (Stanton


The Google Company’s Financial Strains Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Introduction Google is a multinational American company which offers internet search services. It has also developed to offer advertisement services through the internet. This paper seeks to discus the entrepreneurial aspects of the company from a case study. The paper will give an overview of the case study, answer application questions about the study and give the value of the case with respect to entrepreneurship.

Overview The Google Company was formed as a product of a collaboration of a project work of two university students who were undertaking their doctorate studies at Stamford University. Having met in the year 1995, the two students, Page and Brin, started a project work on a search engine technology a year later. They braced financial challenges that faced them as they had no money for even the facilities that they were supposed to be using in their project work.

Such was the extent of their financial strains that they were forced to put on hold their studies for a while and start their work in one of their hostel rooms as they looked for potential investors to fund their project. They finally succeeded to find an investor in the name of Bechtolsheim who gave them one hundred thousand dollars for the project. Further initiatives to raise capital from friends and relatives were successful and the duo managed in the end raise a million dollars to establish their company.

They then settled down in an office in Menlo Park in California which the company outgrew within a year. The company was steadily growing at the time and attracted the attention of companies two of which provided a venture capital to Google worth twenty five million dollars in the year 1999 (Case study 311).

Google used the funds to expand its staff and to make its settlement at their head office in Mountain View. The company has since then been into partnerships that included its agreement with Yahoo in the year 2000, a partnership with AOL in the year 2002 among others.

The company, however, never adopted external funding following its initial one million funding. Google was significantly characterized by a humble establishment and management which were evidenced at the time when the company experienced developments into financial boom through capital venture. Instead of changing its structure in terms of facilities and exorbitant salaries for its workers, Google maintained its status and only increased incentives to its employees (Case study 311).

The company also avoided public ventures until the year 2004 when it floated its shares into the market. Again, the company showed its distinction from the normal traditions as it adopted a completely new initial offer style that it imported from Dutch culture. Contrary to the tradition in which companies independently predetermine the prices of their share offers, Google opted for an auction system in which potential investors are given opportunity to influence the initial offer value.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Under this technique, investors privately give prescriptions in relation to the number and price of shares that they wish to purchase. A minimum share value is then determined by auction and those whose prices fall above the auction price are offered shares. This method was aimed at selling the company’s shares at its market value. The offer was successful though the share prices quickly rose indicating that the selling price could have been fairly below the market value at the time of the offer.

The company again reserved its expenditure after the offer in terms of its renovation and only spent on acquisition of companies that offered product and technologies that were of uttermost importance and interest of the Google Company at that time. This complemented the services offered by the company to include the currently available features such as “Gmail, Google maps, Froogle, Google Video, and Google Talk” (Case study 311).

Discussion The extent to which Google’s partners have helped the company to avoid the need for additional funding or financing

Google Company had a lot of opportunities for sourcing its finances as it grew. Such opportunities as individual’s savings, “family and friends, angels, seed capital, venture capital, banks and government programs, private placements and IPOs” (Kuratko and Hodgetts 210) are some of the financing options that the company had throughout its developments.

These sources can be grouped into two categories, “debt and equity” (Kuratko and Hodgetts 210). The major difference between these categories of sources of financing is the relationship between the entrepreneur and the source of finance or the company and the source.

Under equity, the financing source acquires interest in the business enterprise and might be given a percentage of the organization’s ownership subject to the agreement. Debt type of funding on the other hand is accompanied with the need for repayment of the amount of capital offered to the organization together with any form of interest subject to the debt (Kuratko and Hodgetts 210).

The sources of financing can also be categorized according to stages of development of an organization. Initial stages of an entrepreneurship which are not normally characterized by profit making, but by developing the enterprise which involves funding that are intended to help in establishing an enterprise rather that funding it for its productivity or profitability.

We will write a custom Essay on The Google Company’s Financial Strains specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Such was the initial funding that Google received from Bectolsheim together with the founder’s families and friends. At this stage, the funders are convinced that the enterprise has a potential of making profit and they therefore join in to help in its establishment.

Another stage of capital offer to an entity is the stage where the entity is venturing into offering its products to the market. At this level, the organization can be said to have established its base and has started to produce its goods or to offer its services. The funding is thus meant to help the business enter its market. Such can be identified to be the category of Google’s funding that were received from companies such as Sequoia capital and Kleiner Perkins in the year 1999.

Other categories of funding come after an entity has ventured into a market and are identifiable in terms of its profitability. This category of finances is required for growths of organizations that are already profitable. The case study of the Google Company indicates funding at its initial stages of development with only the initial public offer that came later in the year 2004 to its financing at a developed stage (Minniti, Zacharakis and Spinelli 271).

The partnerships that Google had with individuals and other organization was of great essence to the company in terms of funding. Though some credit can be attributed to the company’s management for being able to avoid seeking funding, the case study reveals that the company was always at its potential to expand at the times when each funding through the partners were realized. An example is the initial funding after which the organization established a new office in Menlo Park.

The next funding which was realized in the year 1999 from two companies saw Google move to another office, recruit more employees and the company’s provision of incentives to its workers. It also saw the company’s expansion of its services to developed technologies that introduced paid listings. The final funding which was the IPO also saw the development of more services by the company.

The trend of expansion of the company with simultaneous review of the funding that the company received gives a correlation between the needs of the company at the particular times that was met with corresponding sufficient funding. The partners who funded the company can therefore be said to have played a major role in helping the company not to seek further funding.

This is because if the partners had to the contrary offered fewer funds that the company wanted then Google could have been forced to seek more funding for its expansions. If the amount of money received by the founders by the year 1999 was not sufficient enough to meet the company’s needs at that time that involved establishing an office and employing workers at the time when the company was not yet making any profit then the founders would have been forced to look for more funding.

The same argument is applicable to the other instances in which the company received funding. The parties that partnered with Google during these funding can therefore be said to have been significantly responsible for the company’s ability to avoid further funding by providing enough capital that the company needed at those respective times (Case study 311).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Google Company’s Financial Strains by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The role played by Google’s partners in the company’s overall success The success of Google can significantly be attributed to the partners that have supported the company at different stages of its growth. According to the Case study, major developments in the company were realized after funding was received from partners. The two founders were for example initially stranded in their initial project, which has turned out to be a multinational company, until they received one hundred thousand dollars from a partner and a further nine hundred thousand dollars that the project picked up.

The founders were for example stranded due to lack of capital and could not initially even purchase equipments that they needed for the project. Further involvements of other partners such as Sequoia capital and Kleiner Perkins companies and the final partnership with investors in the form of floating the company’s shares in the security market facilitated major developments that have been realized by the company.

The partners have therefore been influential to the company through offering funds to the company. Such support can be translated to a number of benefits to the company and its workers. One of such benefits is the motivational factor that is received by the company. This is particularly critical at the initial stages of development of an enterprise.

Receiving funds at a stage when the enterprise was not yet profitable and when the founders equivalently had no resources to invest in their project must have motivated them in two ways. The first motivation was the fact that someone had identified and appreciated their project to be realistic and worth funding while the other benefit was the availed funds that were able to bail them out of their financial strain thereby enabling them to concentrate on the project rather that looking for funds.

The provision of funds by the parties that partnered with Google Company helped in the successful establishment, development and expansion of the company to its current level at which it is a recognized multinational company. The partners through their funds that helped in developing the company through its different stages thus played an important role in driving the company to its currently recognized success. The partners’ major role was thus funding the company that further derived benefits to the success (Case study 311).

Facts about Google: challenges facing the company Google, like any other company, has been faced with a number of challenges over time. Though the company has over time recorded significant expansion in terms of its products and geographical area of coverage, it has been faced with a number of problems some of which have been related to its expansion.

A number of significant challenges, for example, faced the company in the year 2004 with respect to its elements of profitability. The company was, for example, faced with the threat of reduced profit margin following its increased investment. Though the revenues of the company together with its gross and net profit could rise following the investments, it was feared that the degree of increased level of investment would not be proportionally reflected in the company’s profitability.

The company’s move to diversify its services to consumers is also reported to have not been very successful. According to a research that was conducted in the year 2004, the company encountered a lot of problems as it moved to introduce its new services to the market. These problems were so significant that they were expected to even negatively affect the company’s share praises.

The company was at the same time suffering from competition from other companies such as Yahoo which has been a long time competitor of Google. Such occurrences as the company realized had the potential of spilling the fears into the market and giving it a weak image that could cost it its market control among competitors (Standard and poor 1).

Google Timeline Summer 1995: birth of the goggle idea

15 September 1997: registered as a domain

September 1998: Google rents a Silicon Valley garage

February 1999: Google opens Palo Alto office

7 June 1999: Google funded by major venture capital firms (Sequoia capital and Kleiner Perkins)

2000: partnered with yahoo

2002: partnered with AOL

2004: IPO

Another challenge that the company has been facing is its extensively wide market control that portrays it as a monopoly. However, advantageous this may look from outside, it has called for threats of control of the company which could not have been had the company not been in such control. This has an effect of inducing fear on the company to streamline its operations in order to avoid such regulations (Brew 1).

Lessons Learnt Entrepreneurship involves transformation of a person’s innovative ideas into economic worth. The case study reveals the innovation of two students who transformed an academic project work into a multinational company. In their move, the students started their project with absolutely no funds but were able to enter into partnerships with different parties that funded the organization and fuelled it to its current state. Such is the essence of entrepreneurship.

Works Cited Brew, Simon. Google is dominant in its sector, yet its once-bulletproof brand exterior are showing a little bit of wear and tear. Google, 2009. Web.

Case Study. Google: An Interesting and Instructive Funding Journey. New York: Cengage Learning. Print.

Kuratko, Donald and Hodgetts, Richard. Entrepreneurship: Theory, Process, and Practice. New York: Cengage Learning. Print.

Minniti, Maria., Zacharakis, Andrew and Spinelli, Stephen. Entrepreneurship: The Engine of Growth. WESTPORT, CT: Greenwood Publishing Group, 2007. Print.

Standard and poor. Google faces challenges as it expands. Rank for Sales, 2004. Web.


Spiritual Diversity in the Christian Religion Essay best essay help: best essay help

Introduction Christianity is a historical religion that revolves around Jesus Christ as the Lord and savior of humankind. It claims its origin right from the Garden of Eden in the creation story where the first man and woman fell into sin. Jesus came to rescue man and reconnect him to God.

Understanding of these facts and others has led to emergence of diverse spiritualism based on discoveries of historical documents like the Nag Hammadi discoveries in 1945. Such documents challenge the person and life of Jesus. It is important to note that the differences are not at all major but they are indeed very critical.

History The Nag Hammadi discoveries comprised of scripts suspected to have been those of a religion in the early centuries. They comprised of The Gospel of Truth, The Gospel of Thomas, and The Gospel of The Egyptian among others. The religion depicted in these documents show a sharp difference to what the bible says and evidence show that they were based on heresies.

Most of the Christian bishops classified them as such and saw them as obstacles to the spread of the true gospel. The documents were written and circulated by people who purported to be spreading the true gospel of Jesus. It was hard to know the truth as they used Christian vocabularies and largely related to the Jewish customs.

The scripts spread much faster than the other gospel mainly because they claimed to spread tradition about Jesus that was hidden from other people. However, the discovery of similar documents in different times of history and different places theologically, only serves to show the extent to which this religion had spread (Robinson, 3).

A campaign against these ‘misleading’ religious beliefs was started and it was not until the time of the Emperor Constantine in the fourth century when Christianity became the official religion that the Christian bishops felt a relief and the battle was won. Books and documents labeled as heretical were banned.

Anyone found in possession of such books was charged and imprisoned on criminal offense. It is highly suspected that it was during this time that some supporters of this ‘gospel’ hid some manuscripts from destruction and survived until their discovery in the nineteenth century.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Differences God is the center of the differences many Christians hold. Many take God to be an ‘out of this world’ person who is all-powerful and all knowing. On the other hand, others regard it as blasphemous to consider human beings to be the image of God.

Others still see God not as a human being but as a force beyond the confines of the universe. While some Christians claim that Jesus’ death on the cross was to bring salvation, others believe that the most important thing about Him is the life he lived on earth. They attach more importance on the wonderful moral teachings he taught.

Some Christians think of the resurrection as the physical restoration of His body while some believe resurrection was only a symbol and not real. Hell is real for others and considers it the punishment that the unrighteous ones will receive after the present life. To others, hell remains a metaphorical expression of the life without God. Further issues include baptism and the Holy Communion. These are just the few differences that present the base for spiritual diversity among Christians. Gnosticism is just one form of spiritual diversity.

Gnosticism The word gnosis literary has the meaning of wisdom which according to its proponents, it is a divine form of wisdom; meaning that, it is an experience with a supernatural being, in this case, God.

This word may also mean learned or intellectual wisdom and this indicates clearly that Gnosticism is all about the pursuit of human wisdom, knowledge, or intellect and not about spiritual connection with God. The Gnostic tradition dates back to the Vedic philosophy, paganism, Greek traditions, and Zoroastrianism, which implies that it is beyond the Christian traditions. It assumes that, there was once a universal religion, which changed over time due to the spread of people across the world.

The different cultures and environments also contributed to these changes. Therefore, there are people enshrined with these traditions and faith that are no longer their primary intellectual source. The Gnosticism of coming of Jesus was because of the higher power needs; to restore the mystery traditions, therefore, Jesus is not at all superior but a rejuvenation of the old traditions. It is claimed that Jesus’ Gnosticism united the older mysteries to form one larger and powerful system.

Feature of Gnosticism Gnosticism has its own feature and characteristics that make it unique. Gnosis is ‘esoteric’; this means the inner teachings that are responsible of the religious intellect.

We will write a custom Essay on Spiritual Diversity in the Christian Religion specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This knowledge is not available to everyone but only to a select few. The gnosis teachings are deemed mystical because of their ancient origin wisdom, which is claimed as the mother of today’s religious system. They are termed occultism and religious at the same time, occultism because of their secrecy and hidden nature and, religious because they lead back to the world ideals.

Ancient Gnostic teachers taught that, knowing God was the result of knowing oneself. It involved knowing who they were, what they were to become, where they were, and where they were going, where they were coming from, and why they were being released from it, what birth is and what is rebirth.

According to Gnosis, investigation of these matters would result to the knowledge of God. The Gnostic system viewed the world as having two entities meaning that, they had a dualistic view of the world where two equal divine forces are depicted. These forces are God and man where their respective governing of the world is put to measure (Jonas 17). The Gospel of Thomas further depicts the concept of dualism.

The Gospel of Thomas This ‘gospel’ is one of the Gnostic gospels discovered in the Nag Hammadi discovery whereby, Jesus acknowledges having the same power as Thomas by refusing him to call him master. It is estimated to have been authored around 140 A.D. mainly because it is thought to have been written after the New Testament, which dates 60-140 A.D. Jesus is shown to claim that if anyone drunk from his mouth was bound to become as himself.

The teachings here show Jesus as a spiritual guide only, and not as the Lord and the savior, the orthodox Christians regard him. This gospel has many similarities with eastern religions like Buddhism where the founder is only a spiritual leader and not in any way superior. Historically, there are indications that Thomas the disciple of Jesus may have gone to India thus the emergence of suggestions of an influence of Indian tradition in the gospel.

The Creation Story The Nag Hammadi discovery tells many stories differently from the commonly referred to, texts in the Bible. The origin of the human race found in the book of Genesis in the Bible was found in some manuscripts in the discovery. The story is vividly explained from the serpent’s perspective.

The serpent is a representation of divine knowledge or wisdom in Gnostic circle. In this text, ‘the Lord’ is threatening Adam and Eve with death in a bid to prevent them from getting knowledge while the serpent is convincing them to obtain knowledge. Later, ‘the Lord’ expels Adam and Eve from the Garden of Eden when they finally heed the words of the serpent to partake knowledge.

Women Other scripts in the Nag Hammadi discovery seem to depict women as highly placed in the society, something very uncommon especially in those days. There are poems put across in feminine voice that seem to be of a divine power or a goddess. Here is an example of such a poem:

Not sure if you can write a paper on Spiritual Diversity in the Christian Religion by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For I am the first and the last

I am the honored one and the scorned one

I am the whore and the holy one

I am the wife and the virgin….

I am the barren one, and many are her sons….

I am the silence that is incomprehensible….

I am the utterance of my name (Robison, 3).

The Gospel of Mary The Gospel of Mary is another indication of Gnostics’ way of elevating women. It is not exactly clear which Mary is referred to here, but it is largely assumed she is Mary Magdalene. The first six pages of the gospel have not been found to date but the account begins with Christ and his disciples in a discussion after Christ had resurrected.

The gospel shows Christ prohibiting his disciples from teaching spirituality as an external experience but instead instructs them to teach it as an internal experience (Robinson 17). Later, Christ leaves the scene but his disciples are left confused and in great fear. In the text, Mary describes to the disciples her personal experience with Christ including the visions she had seen in a bid to encourage the disciples. She tells them things that the savior had told her when they were together alone.

Though Peter and Andrew acknowledge that Mary is spiritually superior to them, they differ with her sharply and claim that the savior could not have possibly said the words Mary claims He said. Mary depicts the Gnostic principle of inner experience here; it teaches that sin is an indication of the desperate cry of balance by the soul. This insight shows that sin results from the soul’s imbalance and not from moral ignorance.

Conclusion Spirituality is a matter of personal belief on a deity or superior being. It is mainly passed on from generation to generation by the documents left behind, parental guidance and the prevailing conditions in the society. The study above of the different spiritual diversities in Christianity serves as an indication of how small issues can end up separating people in the world. As such, there is bound to be differences in the way these documents are interpreted, which has resulted to diverse spirituality all through history.

Works Cited Robinson, James. The Definitive Translation of the Gnostic Scriptures. New York: Nag Hammadi Library, 1997.


Power of Epiphany Essay essay help site:edu

An epiphany moment is unexpected observation or revelation that has a profound impact on one’s life. Epiphany moment can be spiritual or non-spiritual. At least, everyone has an epiphany experience, which not only changes one’s personal thinking, but also his or her way of life. Elise Ballard writes an inspirational book after conducting personal interviews with people from different backgrounds.

Each of her interviewees had to give a moment of epiphany in their lives that completely changed their lives. Although Ballard describes epiphany with view of spiritual or social context, epiphany is also available in other non- spiritual realms of life such as sports, businesses, and health among others. People undergo personal experiences that make them take up sporting activities and become successful sportsmen or lose their sporting careers.

Majority believe that most people who get involved in sports have an inborn talent. On the contrary, anyone who is determined to achieve a successful career in sports can do so. Through insights, personal experiences, and motivation, most people are able to venture into sporting activities like athletics.

The desire to achieve a gold medal can inspire an athlete to work extremely hard and fully venture into a sports career. Additionally, some people venture into sports after the success of a close relative or friend. Through either motivation or close relationship with a famous sportsperson, he/ she might decide to change his/her career thereby becoming a sportsperson. Famous sportsmen like Kipchoge Keino and Muhammad Ali have inspired and motivated young persons to venture into sports.

For instance, through inspiration and close relationship with Muhammad Ali her father, Leila Ali fully ventured into boxing achieving success. On the other hand, Tiger Wood’s elder brother inspired him to become a golfer. He not only trained him, but also managed his profession, thereby leading to the Woods’ success in the sports world.

Since ancient times, boxing and taekwondo was a male dominated sport. Recently, many women have also ventured into the sport. Although some of the women take up the sport for competing purposes, others venture into the sport for personal defense. The current society is full of physical abuse especially to the female gender.

Most women and girls experience rape or physical abuse from either their spouses or men, which affects them psychologically. In addition, the women who are victims of rape cases lack mechanisms for defending themselves during the attack. Therefore, through brainstorming, women come up with tactics to defend themselves in case of the awful ordeal.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Among the tactics is to encourage women to take up boxing or taekwondo lessons as the main defense mechanisms. Fortunately, through training, personal commitment and experience, some women take it up as a sport, which was not the initial reason. Consequently, the sport not only completely changes their careers, but also lifestyle as they earn living from either boxing or taekwondo. Luckily, such women are able to tour different parts of the world during their tournaments, socializing with people from different backgrounds.

Drug abuse is one of the common vices affecting sportspeople. Most of them take drugs not for medication purposes but for nerve and energy sensitization. A number of sports men especially the athletes are victims of anti-doping agents, which screen sportspeople before any tournament. Therefore, they end up acquiring a five years ban or lifetime ban from athletics.

Those athletes who end up getting a lifetime ban have to change their career in a bid to avoid bankruptcy. Fortunately, some undergo personal experiences or insights that completely change their lifestyle therefore staying away form drugs like narcotics and taking up careers like business.

According to one of Ballard’s interviewees, Ali McGraw “sometimes the most extravagant pain is the gateway to something incandescent” (Ballard 22). Therefore, through painful exposure, some athletes lose their careers but the experience becomes their epiphany, the turning point in their lives leading to a better life. Those who are lucky to get back into sporting career reform and decide to work hard to achieve their titles.

Most sportspeople go through epiphany moments in their lives, which make them to live a better life. For instance, Tiger Woods’ infidelity did not only lead to divorce, but also break from his sporting career. Luckily, the painful experience and the hurting breakup in his family life reformed his personal life and character. On the other hand, Mike Tyson was a victim of drug abuse and physically abused his wife. Due to his cruelty towards his wife, he lost his marriage and ended up in jail.

Unfortunately, the boxing association banned him from the sport because of his drug addiction. Consequently, he became bankrupt and a criminal. According to Ballard, through life experience and lessons one can gain freedom, knowledge, understanding, and information that completely changes his/her routine lifestyles (4). Currently, Woods and Tyson live a clean life away from their vices after the major changes in their lives.

Prediction of the outcome of a tournament in a football match, race, or boxing is one of the fascinations that lovers of sports rely on. Through dreams, cards and insights, some people can correctly predict the outcome of the match.

We will write a custom Essay on Power of Epiphany specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the other hand, an epiphany moment can occur through dreams; therefore, when one continuously predicts the outcome of matches correctly, he/she becomes famous.

For instance, the octopus, popularly known as “John” correctly predicted the outcome of matches during the 2010 FIFA World Cup and the owner used it as a source of income. Additionally, the owner together with “John” became famous receiving worldwide recognitions. Therefore, correct predictions can open doors for extra source of income, which changes one’s life.

In summary, an epiphany is a mysterious moment or experience that a person undergoes, which has a major change in his or her life. The experience can be spiritual or non-spiritual.

Through motivation and inspiration, people have taken up sports like athletics or boxing. Unfortunately, abuse of drugs and bad social behaviors are some of the experiences that change the lives of sportspeople. Due to gender influence, women did not take up some sports like Boxing and Taekwondo; however, with the current escalation of physical abuse, some women are using the tactics for defense.

Others end up taking up boxing as a profession, which completely changes their lives. Therefore, through bitter experiences like rape or ban from a sport, one can venture into a different profession. Sometimes through insights, a person is able to predict correctly the outcome of a tournament therefore becoming famous. Finally, epiphany in sports can either change the lifestyle of a sports person or motivate an individual to win or take up sports as a career or profession.

Works Cited Ballard, Elise. True Stories of Sudden Insight to Inspire, Encourage, and Transform. New York: crown publishing company, 2011


Consumer Protection in the UAE Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Importance of Consumer behavior in UAE


Introduction United Arab Emirates (UAE) being an Arab state is subject to unique behavioral traits among its population emanating from the influence of the Arabic culture and Islam. Several studies have been done to investigate the behavior of consumers worldwide and recent statistics have started to incorporate consumer behavior in Arab states. In this regard, statistics show that, UAE has a high consumer confidence when compared to other countries across the globe.

This statistic shows that, UAE consumers are very optimistic about various aspects of the economy such as future employment opportunities, economic growth and such like aspects of the economy. This study explores this unique attribute of UAE consumers, in terms of the cost and benefit analysis concerning the government, society and businesses alike. Finally, this study will show the importance of consumer behavior in the UAE.

Government Consumer behavior in the UAE is likely to affect the government in several ways. Considering the fact that, UAE consumers have been noted to have a high level of consumer confidence; the government is likely to be under a high pressure to deliver on the expectations of its citizens. In fact, the government is likely to operate under high expectations and increased pressure from consumer groups (and the likes) to meet the expectations of its population.

In this kind of situation, there is very little room for the government to lag in implementing its economic goals because consumers leave very little room for mistakes. The opposite situation would be envisaged when consumers have low consumer confidence because this would mean they have very little confidence in their government and therefore, they are likely to tolerate a lot of government errors and mistakes.

The cost of UAE’s consumer behavior is therefore the high expectations on the government to deliver (this would imply increased efficiency and accuracy in government’s operations) but ultimately, the benefits for such high consumer expectations would be better customer services, increased employment opportunities and the production of better goods and services.

Society UAE’s consumer behavior is likely to have a significant influence on the society because with high consumer expectations, the society is bound to meet the high expectations through increased man-hours, increased human efficiency (like investment in human resource) and a higher level of accountability from the society to relevant stakeholders.

These factors collectively guarantee a high delivery of quality goods, services and economic prospects for the population. Consequently, these factors define the cost factor of the high consumer confidence in UAE. The benefits for such consumer behavior would be better customer services, increased employment opportunities and the production of better goods and services.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Business Businesses are likely to incur most of the costs of a high consumer confidence in the UAE because primary focus will be centered on their levels of efficiency to deliver on the high consumer expectations. The costs will therefore be improved investments in human resource, innovation, and such like facets of the production of quality goods and services and the resultant effect (benefits) would be better customer service, increased employment opportunities and the production of better goods and services.

Importance of Consumer behavior in UAE The importance of consumer behavior in UAE touches on the operations of all sectors of the economy, or sectors engaged in the provision of goods and services. Consumer behavior is vital in ensuring these sectors (such as government, businesses and the likes) perform to their optimum level. Also, consumer behavior provides a benchmark for the provision of goods and services in UAE with adamant consumer behaviors warranting better quality goods and services.

Conclusion This study identifies that, since consumers in the UAE have a high level of confidence for future economic prospects; the government, society and businesses have to improve their level of efficiency and investments in the provision of goods and services because these are the costs of a high consumer confidence. As a result, consumers are bound to enjoy better customer service, increased employment opportunities and the production of better goods and services.


Corporate Ethical Challenges Essay (Critical Writing) argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Role of Corporate Reputation

Factors considered in assessing corporate reputation

Steps to remedy concerns raised by Coca Cola stakeholders

Coca-Cola’s environmental initiatives

Role of Corporate Reputation Corporate reputation is normally based on the past actions as well as the likelihood of the future behaviuor of a company. Good corporate reputation enables a company achieve its corporate objectives. It enables a company and its stakeholders predict the future performance of the company.

Corporate reputation is an asset to a company as it helps improve the value of the company in the financial marketplace. This implies that it helps stabilize the company’s stock listings in the stock exchange. It gives a company the ability to charge fair prices for its products and services.

It helps achieve customer preferences especially in cases where the products and services offered by the company have similar prices as well as quality to those offered by other companies. Thus it helps build customer loyalty based on its actions towards compliance to ethical values as well as social responsibility and this in turn enables it improve its market share.

Suppliers will have trust in the company due to its ability to offer fair trading terms. Social responsibility improves customers’ trust towards the company therefore making them patronize the company’s brands. The company will definitely increase its corporate worth and gain sustained competitive edge over its competitors.

Good corporate responsibility stimulates stakeholder support for the company especially during times of controversy. Key stakeholders who include suppliers, the company’s largest customers, current employees as well as opinion leaders within the business community usually provide support crises that could rock the company’s business operations and market shares.

Factors considered in assessing corporate reputation Stakeholder groups use different criteria to assess corporate reputation which include the social responsibility of the firm, its financial performance, product and service quality as well as the workplace environment. Other criteria include measuring the emotional appeal of the firm’s brand as well as the vision and leadership of company.

Consumer-specific reputation takes into account the product and service quality as well as the emotional appeal of the firm’s brand. It also considers the vision and leadership of the firm. Investor-specific reputation criteria majors on the financial performance of the organization, its leadership and vision and finally the product and service quality. Employee-specific reputation considers the workplace environment, the company’s vision and leadership as well as social responsibility.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It also takes into account the financial performance of the company, its emotional appeal towards employees as well as product and service quality. Supplier-specific reputation criteria majors on the financial performance of the firm as well as its emotional appeal towards suppliers. Finally, reputation specific to the general public measures the company’s social responsibility as well as emotional appeal of its brand to the general public.

The corporate reputation factors are usually not consistent across stakeholders since corporate reputation is normally a situational construct. Thus the factors are relative to decision s the stakeholders are considering.

Steps to remedy concerns raised by Coca Cola stakeholders All the stakeholders of a company are very important for its business growth and therefore addressing all the concerns raised by different stakeholders helps maintain trust from the business stakeholders and achieve business growth. Addressing the concerns requires various steps which include:

Develop a diversity policy to address discrimination in the workforce and promote equal treatment of the culturally diverse employees. The diversity policy will address equal employment opportunities, remuneration, promotion based on merit among many other equality issues. This would motivate workers and help the company avoid losses attributed to lawsuits.

The company will develop an article of association which gives every employee the right to involve in association as long as he or she follows the guidelines provided for in the article and also respects the regulations of the company.

In order to avoid inflated earnings which are as a result of channel stuffing and other financial report fraud cases, the company will retain independent external auditors to audit the financial reports of the company before being presented to the public. The company will also ensure that shipping is done specifically to the orders received from wholesalers and retailers.

The company will take extra precautions on the products it sells in the market. It will ensure that all products set for the market are tested in the company’s laboratory to ensure proportionality of the ingredients. All the raw materials have to be tested in the laboratory to ensure that they are fit for human consumption before they are used for making the products.

In promoting the health of customers, the company will provide accurate and adequate information about the ingredients used in the preparation of the product on the bottles and in its product advertisement so as to enable customers make right choices. It will also sponsor health education through nutrition agencies.

The company will adopt fair trading policies which ensure that suppliers are provided with all the terms of the agreement before signing contracts. The company will agree on terms which benefit both the supplier and the company and adhere to the guidelines of the contract in order to gain supplier trust.

Measures will be taken to preserve the water catchment areas in all its regions of operation and more support provided to communities with water catchment facilities.

Finally, measures will also be put in place to ensure that all the waste from the industrial plants is properly treated before being disposed of.

Coca-Cola’s environmental initiatives Some of the company’s environmental initiatives do not seem to be sincere. Coca-Cola has distribution centers and industries worldwide while its bottle plant only recycles plastic bottles used in North America meaning that it does not recycle other bottles in other continents. These initiatives are not long-term and do not aim at achieving environmental sustainability.

Providing facilities for water catchment without preserving the main water catchment areas can not achieve sustainable development. This is also evidenced by its initiative to provide $20 million dollars to help protect freshwater resources without making the project long-term considering that it is among the companies which consume large amounts of freshwater worldwide.


“Little Red Cap” by Grimm Brothers Essay custom essay help

Authors use different words in their works not by chance. The choice of words is usually presupposed by the meaning people want to cover. Writing stories, authors usually try to hide the main idea of their words to using metaphors, similes, oppositions, personifications, symbols, etc. and making people guess their real meaning.

Considering the line from Little Red Cap by Brothers Grimm, we are going to analyzing the words choice, their implicit and explicit meaning, and phrasing. “Little Red Cap promised to obey her mother. The grandmother lived out in the woods, a half hour from the village. When Little Red Cap entered the woods a wolf came up to her. She did not know what a wicked animal he was, and was not afraid of him” (Grimm 309) is an abstract under discussion.

The grandmother of Little Red Cap lives in “woods” which seems like unsafe place. However, the authors do not choose the word “forest” instead of “wood,” as they want to explain why mother lets their daughter to the unknown place. Woods are used for wood cut, so there might be people.

Forest is more dangerous place and the authors do not want to show mother as careless person. Mother lives her child and hope she is going to be safe near woodcutters. Furthermore, the word “village” is opposed to “woods” in the meaning of safe and unsafe, native place and strange one. The “village” is a place which the little girl used to live in safe, the “woods” is a new world to the little girl, full of with danger.

The usage of the word “to obey” should be considered, as children have to listen and to follow their parents’ saying. But, the very phrase “Little Red Cap promised to obey her mother” (Grimm 309) sounds strange and natural question arises, isn’t it an everyday manner of girl’s behaviour?

The authors use the words ‘to obey’ to emphasize the fault of the little girl’s mother and her way of girls’ upbringing. It seems that the authors want to underline that something is going to happen because a girl “promised to obey” (Grimm 309), but a girl is not aware of the real danger which exists in the woods. Mother says that a girl may fall down and break a bottle of wine, and nothing will be left for grandmother.

The word “wolf” metaphorically describes the stranger who will be harmful to the children. Nothing about wicked people was said, so the girl “did not know what a wicked animal [wolf] was, and was not afraid of him” (Grimm 309). Wolf is a symbol of strange people who may harm. The authors use this character to show that trying to be polite and gentle, strange people may be very dangerous and may cause harm. It is exactly what happens with the girls.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It seems that Brothers Grimm want to caution parents that they should pay more attention to warning their children about possible danger. The authors want to export a dangerous person in the real world as wicked wolf. Not only visibly violence people but also hidden wicked people are able to be harmful to children.

The fairy-tale under consideration does not only entertainments but also teachers lessons to the readers. Little Red Cap shows parents the importance of making young children get information of moral conduct subconsciously since early childhood. The authors hide the implied meanings and cover them up the word choices. If readers try to analyze the word or parsing, they get much information about the hidden meaning of the story and the lessons they teach. Close reading is required for understanding the lessons offered for people.

Works Cited Grimm, Jocob and Wilhelm.“Little Red Cap.” Making Argument about Literature: A Compact Guide and Anthology. Ed. John Schilb and John Clifford. New York: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2004. 308 – 311. Print.


Management, Leadership and Communication Report (Assessment) college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Background and Additional Research Summary

Discussion of Issues

Discussion of the Root Causes

Recommendation for Future Actions

Works Cited

Background and Additional Research Summary Two Stanford engineers in California founded HP Company, which deals in global computer, in 1938 as an electronic instruments company. Engineers and scientist quickly approved HP products by 1940 and its growth arose tremendously during the period due to purchases made by American government during the Second World War.

By 1970s, HP had grown from highly centralized to into one with many widely dispersed divisions and activities. HP began to use a concept called ‘local decentralization, in which a division was given full responsibility for a product line. The decentralization, that HP had until 1980s had had its own problems for the company.

HP began to be perceived by users as three or four companies, with little coordination between them. An elaborate network committee was found to be the source of slow decision-making in the organization. The then CEO John young therefore dismantled the committee as a part of reorganization. He further divided the computer business into two primary groups to ensure decentralization.

The revenue of HP increased from $13.2 billion in 1990 to $38.42 in 1996 courtesy of a large market share of PCs and printers. However, due growth and size of operation with 83-product division, bureaucracy had increased significantly.

In 1999, the board of HP Company appointed Carleton S. Fiorina (Fiorina) as the new CEO of the company. Revenue grew by 15% for the financial year 2000, due to reorganization strategies carried out by Fiorina.

The company realized a low net profit that was below the net profit of the industry towards the end of the financial year that ended in Dec 2001. Layoffs of 1700 marketing employees soon followed. Analysist suggested that the reason behind this was Fiorina’s aggressive management reorganization in the face of global slow down in technology sector.

Discussion of Issues Management Issues: HP a major global computer company has increasingly faced challenges in areas of management, communication, and leadership. In order to bring back efficiency in the company, Miss Fiorina the CEO of the HP Company as at in July 1999 introduced aggressive management reorganization (Tuner 87).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Leadership Issues: Fiorina in an attempt to set things right, began demanding regular updates on key units. She enhanced discipline in the sales force by establishing and maintaining the required targets. By introducing incentives, she aimed at ensuring that the targets set are met. However, during Fiorina’s tenure despite the reorganization, she did little to improve the HP performance. The market gains made when she was a CEO started to dwindle. PC share had fallen from 7.8% to 6.9% for the 12 months ended January 31, 2001.

Financial Issues: Reorganization brought about by Fiorina had an impact on the financial well being of the company. For the quarter ended January 31, 2001, the net profits were well below the stock market expectations leading to employee layoffs.

Communications: The reorganization resulted to more problems in the communication aspect. The new structure did not clearly assign responsibility for profits and losses as the responsibility to growth was shared between front-and back-end managers, there was less financial control and more disorder.

Discussion of the Root Causes Reorganization: According to analyst Fiorina mission was doomed to fail simply because she was trying a new approach that had never been tried before at a company so complex and large in scale like HP.

The aggressive restructuring of the organization was only successful during early year of Fiorina tenure but could not be sustained due to the complexity of the HP operations and slow down in global technology. For example customers were not happy with reorganization .The front-back reorganization had created confusion internally, and many customers said they had noticed little improvement.

Communication: The new structure did not clearly assign responsibility for profit and losses and this lead to less financial control and more disorder. The back-end program designers would not be able to stay close enough to the customers to deliver products as per their requirements. Neither would the executive responsible for selling thousands of HP be able to monitor each product they are selling. Getting personnel from different divisions over 120 countries to work together posed a communication challenge (Miles 68).

Leadership: During Fiorina tenure, things got bad to worse. She did little to consult the technocrats and wanted to solve HP problem all at once which mounted to more problems arising. Market share had started to reduce at the end of her tenure.

We will write a custom Assessment on Management, Leadership and Communication specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Fiorina dismantled decentralized organizational structure to transform HP from a ‘strictly hardware company’ to a Web services powerhouse. Nevertheless, even this strategy did not shield the problems the company was facing. Despite the reorganization, she did little to improve the HP performance. The market gains made when she was a CEO started to dwindle. PC share had fallen from 7.8% to 6.9% for the 12 months ended January 31, 2001.

Change Management: Reorganization in the HP Company was rapid and this left little room for employees at the company to adjust accordingly. Massive layoffs were carried out to keep the company afloat. The change brought confusion and less coordination in the Company. The reorganization was not managed well with all stakeholders involved.

Recommendation for Future Actions For future mitigation of the structural and operational problems as experienced in the HP Company, the following recommendations are suggested:

There will be a need to provide policies that govern change in the organization for easy and smooth transition. This approach will ensure coordination and empowerment of employee in decision-making. Before any adaptation of a change in an organization, a feasibility study must be explored to know if the change is to be adopted is worthwhile. Change management will involve thoughtful approach to the organizational structure so that any change made should be sustainable and manageable.

Proper planning by all stakeholders should be done to ensure the success of the change in the organizational structure. Consultation with the experts should be done when creating policies that govern change in the organizational structure. Lastly, structural reorganization should gradual in implementation so that employees can adapt to any changes made. A drastic change in the organization brings about confusion and miscommunication in the organization.

Proper channels of communication in the organization are very essential in the running and even change in the organizational structure. Good communication encourages coordination of activities and minimizes wastage of time. In the case of HP company, communication approach was top –bottom or vertical in nature.

It is for this reason that the individuals around Fiorina were comfortable in terms of communication but those without felt left out. Communication empowers people in decision-making and thus enables decentralization of organization. In this case, information technology should be explored. Systems such as extra, intra, and internet should be adopted in the organization to reduced information traffic and decentralize organization.

Customer service systems will encourage communication between the customers and the organization. These communications will involve even changes in the organization so that the loyalty of the customers is not affected. Specialist in information technology should be consulted to develop a system that will connect all the stakeholders in the organization so that the organization becomes a horizontal one where anyone is accessible.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Management, Leadership and Communication by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Training of members of the organization should be taken into consideration after any major change has taken place in the organization. Training not only prepares one for the anticipated change but also gives employee skills and knows how to deal with changes in the organization.

Experts should be contracted to handle the training aspect in the change management. Senior executive should also be trained to sharpen their leadership skills to handle the organization as a result of the new change. Employee’s roles and responsibilities should be stated well during the training session so that at any time everyone knows what he or she is to do. Training moreover motivates employees and boost up their morale in the work activities.

Fiorina should analyze with the help of experts the processes that are not adding value to the organization and those that do. This will enable her to concentrate efforts and resources to products and process that will add positive value to the organization. For example the front-back reorganization had created confusion internally should be done away with since it did not add value to the organization as a whole but instead attracted complains form customers for its in effectiveness.

Fiorina should also seek to know where the problem lies in the supply and distribution chain. She should seek to understand if over diversification has drained the resources of the organization to make more profits. If so then she should only concentrate on the most profitable products as opposed to going conglomerate.

Fiorina should also benchmark with her competitor organization. HP business performance should be compared to competitors such as DELL, COMPAQ and others so to rate the business in terms of performance. Best practices and innovations should be incorporated and even improved in the company. Comparative pricing should be done to set a good market price for the products. This strategy will ensure a competitive edge ahead of the competitor thus greater market share.

HP products should be unique and better than the products from other competitors to attract more customers. Proper marketing for these products should be maximized to reach all market segments. HP products should be designed in away that it fulfils customers need and expectation. Sales promotions and other marketing strategies should be explored for HP Company to have even greater market share. Market research should be carried out to find other markets where the competitor has not explored to maximize on sales.

The performance of employees can be evaluated with an effective performance management system. This method can be explored in the HP Company where supervisor and manager ensure performance by the employees’ .Issues of time wastage and non-performance will be eliminated. Performance contracting ensures maximum productivity by employees and carrier development as employees specialize effectively in their areas of activity.

Works Cited Miles, Raymond. Organizational strategy, structure, and process. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2003.Print.

Tuner, Rodney. The handbook of project-based management: leading strategic change. New York: Prentice Hall, 2009.Print


The fire station goals, objectives and missions Report online essay help

Introduction To study the goals and mission of the fire department, I will take the New York City fire department as an example. The fire station is guided by a written goals and objectives stated in the FDNY strategic plan for the 2009-2010. The New York City fire station is for the third time publishing its goals and objectives, enabling it to successfully implement its services to the community.

Main text The station had five specific goals and objectives for the year 2009 to 2010. The objectives include improvement on the emergency on the response to the fires, natural disasters and other emergency situations. Second is providing the stations members with the good health and safety. The third goal is to strengthen the development of both the management and the administration. The fourth goal is for the station to increase its services in other region.

Lastly, the fire station needs to advance in the fire prevention services and also on the safety teachings methods. The stations objectives are important for the community since the people can benefit from the wide range of services that will ensure less property destruction from fires. Also there will be quick response to the hospital emergencies, harmful material accidents, abnormal disasters, and other situations that requires emergence response.

In the year 2007 to 2008, the New York fire station had established a three years Borough commands strategic planning system which had followed the department of bureau operations goals. The fire station had also an objective in the year 2010 of forming Borough commands department that meant to address the queens and Staten Island division, battalions and companies.

The department aim was to serve the New York City residents and visitors. The department was also aimed at giving all the station members and the public, the necessary information and vivid understanding of the fire stations achievements and future stations growth.

The New York fire station has also incorporated its goals and objectives in the fire service agency program. The station has several service agency programs including the special operations command service agency, the customers and stakeholders’ services agency system among other service agencies.

Each of these agencies has it own performances distinct from each other although each agency helps the fire station to achieve its objectives. On the other hand, the fire station operational programs like response to the emergency operations and fire prevention in the community have supportive hand to the agency goals and strategic plan.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The fire station aims at training the fire officers and soldiers and taking them to USA for a bachelor’s degree in fire science and safety. Under this plan, the station will be enhancing its mission which states that it is targeting at giving the first response to any emergency.

Also by training the fire workers, the station will be able to achieve its mission by protecting the community lives and properly. Trained officers and soldiers will resource the fire station with necessary skills that will advance the New York public safety. On the other hand training of the officers will help the station to deliver its service on time therefore contributing significantly to the safety of New York community.

Conclusion The New York fire station has goal and objectives are aimed in benefiting the community at large. The fire station is also aimed at becoming one of the best fire station in New York and the environs.


Re-entry collateral consequences on education and housing Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

History and the process of reentry process

System and Policy

Solutions as to strengthen various services


Works Cited

Introduction Reentry refers to the issues related to the transition of ex-offenders from incarceration to community. Reentry comprises of all the efforts aimed at ensuring that those released from prison are able to relate well with the general society.

Collateral consequences of criminal charges or the “Four’Cs” are the indirect consequences of criminal convictions and “comprise a mixture federal, statutory and regulatory law as well as local policies and are part of arrest, prosecution or conviction but are not part of the sentence imposed” (National Crime Prevention Council 1).

The essay looks at reentry collateral in details and the effects it has had on the community and individuals. The systems and policies being applied by organizations are analyzed. A discussion on how to improve the policies being implemented before they become laws is included in this article.

History and the process of reentry process It can be correctly argued out that those who are involved in the reentry programs have one main goal of ensuring that the subjects integrate well with the society. It is significant that the returning person is able to fit well with the society as this will make it possible for him/her to avoid engaging in criminal activities.

Some of the challenges the ex-prisoner is likely to face include housing, public safety, employment and families. Other challenges to reentry include problems with family relationships where if not already problematic, are often weakened by incarceration. Convicted felons have difficulty finding employment and this can be aggravated by prison experiences (Irwin 1).

Recidivism is the process whereby there is a tendency to re-lapse into previous criminal behavior; the individual characteristics that influence recidivism includes “demographic characteristics, prison experience, employment history, education level, criminal record, and substance abuse dependence” (The Heritage Foundation 1). It has been noted that recidivists tend to have a history of crime record which is traceable to their early ages when they were still young (The Heritage Foundation 1).

Ex-prisoners have a lower rate of literacy than individuals in the general population, ex-prisoners also face unmet health and mental needs and housing issues due to legislation that bar the ex-convicts (National Crime Prevention Council 1). Some of the housing issues that ex-offenders face include: finding affordable rental housing, maximizing the use of existing housing resources and identifying and eliminating the stigma of ex-offenders in order to receive housing from the society (The Heritage Foundation 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It has been noted that families offer very significant support for the individuals who are entering the society from the prisons: “former prisoners living with their families are less likely to drop out of reentry programs compared to their counterparts who do not live with their families” (The Heritage Foundation 1).

Collateral consequences mean legal, social and economic barriers to an individual reentry into his/her society:

Although many individuals released from jail leave with the hope of a fresh start, these barriers make it difficult for the individual to integrate into the community and hence the reason why many ex-prisoners go back to jail. (Irwin 1)

Elsewhere collateral consequences have been described as: “Invisible punishments, unseen and often devastating, largely hidden and unspoken until it is too late” (National Crime Prevention Council 1). Collateral consequences are indirect consequences of criminal convictions and comprise “a mixture federal and statutory and regulatory law as well as local policies” (National Crime Prevention Council 1).

The second chance act signed into law by president Bush is a response to a glowing crisis in the United States of America faced by ex-prisoners once they are out of jail. It has made significant improvement but a lot needs to be done by community groups, county governments, state governments, church welfare groups and nongovernmental organizations for it to fully succeed and its impact felt in the society.

The act recognizes the need for comprehensive and integrated services. It is a benchmark for reentry programs and policies for the federal government to intervene in a growing crisis (The Heritage Foundation 1).

The government has made significant funding since the act become law and significant impact has been felt where the program has been initiated and in most cases the results from such an initiation has been a great success.

We will write a custom Essay on Re-entry collateral consequences on education and housing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It should be noted that, “the act did expand the federal government’s role in the reentry process by creating grants for states to implement prisoner reentry programs; the Act authorized $330 million for prisoner reentry programs during fiscal years 2009 and 2010” (National Crime Prevention Council 1). More laws have been passed in relations of the reentry:

Congress also passed laws that temporarily or permanently disqualified persons convicted of felony and drug related oddness from receiving certain federal welfare benefits and disqualified those convicted of any drug related offences in the country from receiving federal educational grants.

In addition, congress passed laws declaring individuals and their households ineligible for federal housing assistance if they have been convicted of specified criminal activity. Moreover congress did give local authorities vast discretion to local housing authorities to establish standards regarding criminal records (National Crime Prevention Council 1).

System and Policy In this section a reports on an identified system and policy connected with that system that affects incarcerated, former incarcerated and family members is briefly discussed. Montgomery county has come up with policies, program and a system that offers ex-prisoners a second chance. The system and policy at the Montgomery has registered a significant success and therefore will be a good example to study.

Re-entry efforts in Montgomery County in Ohio have been a good study for policy and law makers, it is a success story of an effective well managed program. The re-entry task force in the county assembled an extensive collaborative force of over 200 community leaders from different professions including ex offenders for their valuable insight into the issue and how the community would benefit from their insight (Montgomery County).

The re-entry task force accomplished its work through a combination of several work groups including children, families, continuum of care, employment, housing, legal issues and advocacy, pre/post-release services and technical teams. Re-entry programs in Ohio were 246 in 2009 (Montgomery County).

The Montgomery county has been providing a variety of specialized rehabilitative services, which include providing common pleas court system that focuses on encouraging ex-offenders to succeed as law abiding citizens without first going to prison, this program seeks to address whatever dysfunction has resulted in the offender committing the crime, other program include residential drug intervention services, education and employment opportunities, specialized supervision of felony, non support cases and community drug intervention and education.

Specialized services include life support that focuses on providing necessary skills that affect positive behavioural changes such as male’s issues group, emergency assistance and alternatives to violence program (Montgomery County 1).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Re-entry collateral consequences on education and housing by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Other specialized programs include case management where there is an individual and group contact between offenders and community control officers, others include secure transitional offender program and felony non support court which is a specialized court that was implemented in an effort to ensure payment of court-ordered child support obligations.

Stop the violence me is a program designed to educate men on violence, power and control in relationships and empathy for the victim. To ensure that the efforts make some significant achievement, a number of local, non profit agencies are given financial support to assist the re-entry population (Montgomery County 1).

Montgomery County has also provided services to ex offenders who are part of Montgomery County “call in sessions”; these sessions offer individuals a chance to turn their lives around and provide services to those who are willing to do so including case management, job training and educational services.

A number of community based providers also offer services to ex offenders; the council also assists a few non profit agencies with financial support to assist the re-entry population such as Dayton urban league, action partnership, Salvation Army booth house, mercy manor and volunteers of America (Montgomery County).

Solutions as to strengthen various services Re-entry services must be offered in a coordinated fashion, the re-entry system is usually a complex network made up of many interdependent systems. We simply cannot afford to have these various systems and services working in isolation.

Hence, all agencies and organizations – both public and private – will need to be engaged in service coordination in order to respond to the many barriers encountered by the ex-offender upon their release into society. Only Complete service integration through a network of community partnerships will be vital in ensuring that these efforts are to be successful in the future and have positive impacts on both the community and ex offender (Montgomery County).

Another factor that demonstrates the importance of public-private partnerships is the fact that the government cannot fund this initiative on its own as the government cannot participate everywhere. Many years of experience have shown that with governmental programs of all types, public money eventually dries up. This is true for both governmental funding used to initiate new services as well as governmental funding used to leverage funds from the private sector for the continuation of services.

This results in services decreasing and later ceasing to exist. To counteract this occurrence, the community must exhibit a sincere investment in a particular service and bear a significant portion of the necessary funding. It is only through public-private partnerships that sustainability is even a possibility (Montgomery County 1).

The Ohio prisons have realized that it may not be possible to always rehabilitate all convicts in the system and have consequently partnered with the Montgomery County to reduce recidivism and bring attention to the state of reentry in Ohio hence the need for increased cooperation (Montgomery County 1).

There is a need to increase the number of transitional, supportive, and affordable ex-offender housing opportunities in Montgomery County for high-risk groups (i.e., individuals with sex offenses on their criminal record, mental health disorders, and/or substance dependency) as well as for families and children (Montgomery County 1).

It would be wise if an assessment for the needs of each inmate is carried such that the same can be consistently followed upon being released from prison. When possible, applications and steps toward accessing student loans and other financing will take place prior to release so as to aid in education (Montgomery County 1).

There should be negotiation with the local housing authority to recommend that families and children are given a preference on the waiting lists.

There is also a need to develop supportive housing units that will supply needed services and appropriate transitional housing for up to one year (Irwin 1).

Develop a program for ex-offenders to use “sweat equity” to rehabilitate homes which might otherwise be demolished, similar to the Habitat for Humanity model (Irwin 1).

Develop a Housing Locator containing informational materials to be given to ex-offenders before they are released that includes available housing opportunities based upon eligibility criteria, this will lead to former prisoners having shelter and help reduce crime recurrence from such ex-convicts (Irwin 1). A needs assessment must be conducted with each inmate prior to release and it should be incorporated in the Reentry Plan and consistently followed up when the prisoner is released into the community (Irwin 1).

It would be significant if courts are given more discretion in determining treatment options and authorizing early discharge from special probation for individuals who make exceptional progress (Irwin 1).

Conclusion For there to be successful reentry program and effective policies and systems, there must be effective partnership between the community, ex-prisoners, government, non-profit groups and also inmates themselves to avoid ex-convicts going back to jail. Well implemented reentry programs have helped former prisoners to integrate back to the community and contribute to the growth of the community positively and also become role models for recidivists and prisoners.

Works Cited Irwin, John. The Warehouse Prison: Disposal of the New Dangerous Class. NY: Oxford University Press, 2004. Print.

Montgomery County. Reentry Report. Montgomery County, 2011. Web.

National Crime prevention council. Prisoner Reentry Presentation. NCPC, 2007. Web.

The Heritage Foundation. Secodn Chance Act. The Herotage Foundatio, 2011. Web. .


Racial Discrimination in America Research Paper essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

History of Racism in US

Racial Discrimination against Native Americans

Racial Discrimination against the Black population

Impacts of Racial Discrimination

Steps to stop Racial Discrimination

Legal perspective of Racial Discrimination

The US’s Current Fight against Racism


Works Cited

Introduction Racial discrimination is unfair treatment of individual/s because of the difference in color, origin and ethnicity. Racial discrimination has persisted in the US and all other parts in the world; it is a major challenge in the US. In Queensland, there is a law against discrimination. Racial discrimination denies the people discriminated against many opportunities that they otherwise have enjoyed (Flinders University 1)

African Americans, Hispanic Americans, Native Americans and Asian Americans have been affected by institutional and individual racism. This discrimination is as a result of some Americans relating ability to race. Some believe that the whites have greater potential and ability. This is therefore displayed by the way they treat people (Randall 1). Racism occurs in many ways: it can be between those that are staying together or neighbors or it can also be by teachers, employee or student (Flinders University 1).

Racism comes in different forms. The main three forms are individual racism, institutional racism and cultural racism. Individual racism is when individual or group discriminates and treats people of different race in an unfair manner. Institutional racism is encountered through institutions by their policies; this can be either knowingly or unknowingly. Cultural racism is discrimination on the basis of a person’s values, beliefs and cultural practices.

This essay will discuss in details the meaning of racial discrimination or racism. The essay will also discuss the effects of racism and how it influences people in the society. The law and regulations including the measures that the governments should take will also be included in this essay. The reference society is the USA thus this paper examines the racial discrimination in America.

History of Racism in US United States is made up of different people. Originally, it was made up people from Asia and Europe. There were also slaves from Africa and Native Americans. US is the most immigrated place with many people from all over the world (Anti discrimination Commission Queensland 1).

In 1920, there was the great threat of racism. The non Protestants Catholics and Jews Orientals and black population were the first victims to suffer discrimination. This was because Americans had values that they never wanted to change. The Americans subjected those they discriminated against, to hard labor in poor working conditions. It is said that the Americans did not like the new language and thus that acted as a basis for discrimination (Anti discrimination Commission Queensland 1).

In 1920s the US formed an organization to restrict immigration. The Immigration Restriction League had said that the immigrants from South East Europe were inferior and were about to decrease the supremacy of the US (Anti discrimination Commission Queensland 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The US population also used abusive and hatred language referring to the immigrants. They used some nick names that were evidence of their hatred to the non Americans. Those from Latin background were referred to as Spic. Italians were referred to as Dogo, Guinea and Grease. Kike, Chink, Polack and Hun were also used together with many others (Racial Discrimination in America During the 1920’s 1).

In 1917 there was Bolshevik revolution.US reacted towards it. There was a belief that the Europeans were going to take over US. This was known as Red Scare. The Europeans were holding many riots and strikes in the labor force. This cost the Europeans a lot of suffering. Just after this the justice department organized for their arrest and they arrested about 6000 people. They raided their homes to get hold of the so called anarchists and communists (Racial Discrimination in America During the 1920’s 1).

The raids were named after the attorney general of that time Mitchell Palmer who had planned for them. America was filled with fear of losing its power and consequently immigration restricted. Even those in the rural areas believed that the law was right since the immigrants wanted to change their way of life (Racial Discrimination in America During the 1920’s 1).

This was followed by enforcing laws to regulate immigration. In 1921 they drew a line of 3% immigration. In 1924 Johnson Reed Act was stricter to the terms and conditions of this law. The Americans had become so negative towards immigrants that it become evident in the judicial system, for instance, two Italians were sentenced to death for stealing from a pay master. This was too much punishment for such a crime (Racial Discrimination in America During the 1920’s 1).

In 1920s the US government did not consider the aliens in its effort to reduce poverty. Even the president then kept a low profile on the issue immigrant discrimination. The US did its best to fight the minorities and advocated for 100% Americanism (Racial Discrimination in America During the 1920’s 1).

Ku Klux Klan organization was then formed to fight and protect American Protestants from foreign influences. This organization targeted the Catholics and the Jews. They used a burning cross as their symbol. The group grew instantly and got revenues from the profits that were made from membership, regalia, costumes and rituals.

They used force to have pure Americans in the nation. Murder, threats and intimidation were their main tactics. The Ku Klux Klan Lynched blacks in Southern America. Their means was to look for offences, mostly the minor crimes so as to get more victims (Chronicle 1).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Racial Discrimination in America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Discrimination was even experienced at the workplaces whereby the immigrants were only allowed to take the lowest paid jobs which at the same time were the most tiring ones. It is noted that the blacks were especially very handy in the farm jobs and generally the American society did not like the immigrants and went to all levels to discriminate the blacks and the colored people including the native Indians from public and social places (Chronicle 1).

Jews were also discriminated in the education sector. This was because they were seen to be succeeding well in their jobs. The US therefore said that it was not problem to work with the Jews, but it was serious problem to socialize with them since Americans Racism in the 21st Century was mainly between blacks and whites. As a result the Catholics came together and formed a separate high school athletic conference. This however was not allowed into the system until 1966 under forced legislation (Chronicle 1).

1920s was mainly the time when there was racism carried out on a large scale against the minorities. The discrimination that was in existence before this was nurtured such that its effects were strongly felt (Chronicle 1). The whites in the US are to blame for the existing racism at the present time. They are the ones who allowed slavery and later on formulated and implemented policies that were discriminative (Robinson 1).

Racial Discrimination against Native Americans Native Americans were harshly affected by racism. The Native Americans occupied US before the colonial era. The US made a lot of effort to get most of North American land. Their strategy involved use or mistreatment people. They targeted food, massacres, forced displacement and imposition of treaties. Those who survived were given only 4% of the land that was taken away from them by US. The natives signed treaties with the US but they were later violated (Chronicle 1).

Native Americans have been discriminated even in health centers. Concerning the Native Americans, Giago wrote, “It goes, first you apply, and then they deny and hope you will die. This has a special meaning to Americans” (Giago 1). Many Americans surprisingly are not aware of the situation.

From research it has been seen that American Indians and Alaskan Natives earn very low income. It is also a concern that these people receive the lowest education and therefore have the least people who get college degrees despite their distinctive status. They have also been seen to have the highest rate of people who are living below the poverty line. In addition there are many incidences of accidental deaths as well as suicides (Adams 62).

Racial discrimination is heavily felt in social institutions such as occupation, health, education, police and legal systems. The situation is more serious in urban areas. Lack of jobs has made the situation worse because many have lost their social network (Adams 62). The federal rules to distinguish between the Native Americans had been used strictly to eliminate the mixed blood from the privileges. The aim then was to promote and maintain the supremacy of the US (Adams 64).

Racial Discrimination against the Black population Initially racism was known to be against the blacks. About 11% of the American population is black population. Firstly, the Negroes were deprived of their right to vote consequently they thus denied the right to political influence.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Racial Discrimination in America by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The blacks were only given the most despised jobs and hardest jobs which were available. At present the majority of the unemployed populations are blacks. The public places were not accessible to majority of the blacks. It was not allowed for the whites and blacks to go to the same school or eat from the same table. It was also not common to travel in the same train. (Tse-tung 1)

The hatred against the blacks was so deep that racist organizations were formed to fight the blacks. The most popular organization was the Ku Klux Klan. The Ku Klux Klan organized and killed many Negroes.

The Negroes were harassed by authorities and blamed for committing crimes which they never committed. They were consequently beaten and treated unfairly by the authorities who were supposed to protect them. They therefore received no justice and did not enjoy the rights that were supposed to be provided by the government (Tse-tung 1).

Back in 1957 the black population was living under wave of lack of education. This was because the authorities had denied the black children access public schools. The black population later on expressed their agony because of racism and held demonstrations trying to change the situation. This was to support their quest for the right to access shops, restaurants and many public places. (Tse-tung 1)

Their efforts to fight for freedom led to formation of a group, which was known as freedom riders in 1960. In 1962, many of the Negroes died as they fought for right to be educated: this was in Mississippi. In 1963, many Negroes were arrested in groups as they held meetings and parades whose theme was to fight racial discrimination.

Mr. Medgo Evers met his death since he was leading the group at Mississippi. The Negroes then formed an association known as American Negro Association that conducted a freedom march at Washington (Tse-tung 1)

In 1997, the Black Women’s Health Study conducted a research on the population of women with breast cancer. They found out that those who had breast cancer were mostly the ones who were experiencing some form of discrimination. Stress due to discrimination is usually related with somatic disease. Most of the blacks had gone through discriminative experiences. They complained of difficulties in accessing jobs, housing or education (Taylor et al. 1).

Other research is being done to determine the association of hypertension with the increase cases of discrimination in black Americans. In a number of past years the psychological effects have been shown to have an effect on breast cancer. Women experiencing psychological stress are more likely to have breast cancer. A research based on the association between breast cancer and stress of work showed that there was no relationship between the two (Taylor et al. 1).

The black descendants in America lacked anyone to listen to their cry. They did not have any political influence. Comparing their population of 150 million with that of indigenous Americans of 40 million it is ironical that they have very little to say in the matters affecting them.

Impacts of Racial Discrimination Degradation of Mental Health

Racial discrimination has been associated with deterioration of mental health. Research has shown that black Americans have had a lot of problems with their mental wellness. This is mainly affected by their environmental conditions of which they experience on every day basis.

They are also vulnerable because of the nature of work they do and the little wages they get out of it. This will then translate into a kind of lifestyle they will be able to live and even the food that they are able to afford. Statistics show that the Black Americans are mostly stressed than the whites. Reports have shown that about 75% of the blacks have experienced discrimination (Viklunds 1).

Mental deterioration has a negative impact even to the economy of the country. This is because these potential people are locked up in a place that they cannot help themselves. They are not given a favorable environment to exploit their talents (Viklunds 1).

Racism and Violence

Racism has also led to fights and hatred. Violence directed even to children at times has been caused by hostile neighbors and the leaders of the land and the authorities. Europe has been seen to have a lot of racism amongst children where violence has broken out against the ones being discriminated (United Nations 6). Racism is also seen in prisons. From statistics in 2005 blacks were arrested three times as whites. Death sentences were four times in blacks than in whites (Peoples Daily 1).

Racism and Suicide

Racism has been associated with many suicides. It has been a common thin for the Native Americans to commit suicide. Though they are only about 1% of the US population, the male’s deaths due to suicide has been on the increase. It is mostly common to those who work in the government. These suicides are by use of fire arms and the percentage is about 60%. Research from Centre for Injury Prevention and Control has shown that most of these suicides are as a result of social inequalities (Kendall 21).

Racism and Education

In education, there has been great discrimination mostly to the children. These innocent children suffer in different ways. There is also discrimination of accessing education. Schools with the best facilities are only for the rich where those discriminated cannot afford. This has a negative impact on these children as they will find it very hard to raise their standards of living (Kamali 5).

The case of education discrimination on race or color basis was noted by CERD and the Committee on the Rights of children. Education discrimination can also take another form which is use of books and statements that have a negative implication towards a certain race. This will make the children to grow with a negative attitude towards the race which is negatively referred to.

The teachers and how they teach the children tend to affect the minds of the pupils. This is because at a tender age one is able to learn something that will remain forever in their minds (United Nations 5)

Failure of the government to address the issue of racial discrimination has been the main contributing factor to racial discrimination. This is because it is the authorities who are supposed to be at the front line to stop racial discrimination. The failure of the government to formulate and implement strict policies to stop racism has caused it to be persistent. Schools, for instance, have been victims of racism, yet there are no rules and regulations to protect the children and those who work the hardest for the betterment of the US (United Nations 7).

There is also failure to provide the necessary materials and education to the teachers. This has caused employment of teachers without knowledge or information on the negative impact of racism. Neglect of education to the minorities has led to many potential professionals being denied a chance to develop.

Racial Discrimination in Children

In addition, there are no adequate finances for the minority children to access better facilities. The minorities work very hard but they are not able to afford best education and yet there is no financial assistance that is offered to them. When children are discriminated at a tender age, their character is shaped in a negative way. Firstly it makes them to perform poorly in school. The discouragement they get due to poor performance may cause majority to refuse schooling at a young age (United Nations 8)

The minority children are also shown to have lower school attendance than the other children. Lack of quality education in schools has caused children to have a lower level in the society in their adulthood. This is because of lack of good f foundation in education (United Nations 9)

Racial discrimination in children moulds their character. It makes them to tolerate racism and accept it. The result is that they will grow and live like that with them also discriminating the other new people that may get into the nation. The repeated action between generations makes racism to persist and take roots in the society (United Nations 9)

Racial discrimination may have a permanent effect that almost become impossible to reverse. Racial discrimination may lead to loss of certain cultures. Those non respected minorities may want to deny their origin in order to fit into a certain group and to find acceptance in the society. This way, culture diversity reduces and even the good cultures and practices by minorities are forgotten gradually. The result is that they become extinct or uncommon.

The language of a certain group can end because the subsequent generations shy from learning the language because of the negativity associated with it. At the end there will be no one or just a few to speak their language (United Nations10).

Psychological problems also come as a result of racial discrimination. This is because the children are in need of a name and identity and they become aware that their culture or their color is not liked by the majority. They become unconfident and may not live as themselves but live an imposed life because of the circumstances around them.

Impact on Employment

Racial discrimination has a negative impact on the field of employment. It is in both children and adults. In children it is seen when the children are employed at a young age also known as child labor. This has been seen, for example, in Mexico. Many under 18 children in 1999 were known to have worked in the agricultural sector in Mexico (United Nations 12).

There is also discrimination of minority employees. They work under poor working conditions. They are also exploited in that they get least wages and that they are given those jobs involving a lot of physical activity and energy. The minority employees are therefore treated badly.

Instead of performance criteria of promotions, most people from the minority communities work so hard but never get any reward or promotion. In addition, there are cases where the minorities’ employments have been unjustly terminated without good reasons (United Nations 12).

Racial Discrimination and poverty

Racial discrimination has been a source of poverty to the minority. When they are not able to get quality education, they end up getting the worst jobs without good salaries. Since they earn a little, their children also fall into the same trap because they will not be able to provide good education to them. There is a repeated status of lack which makes poverty to persist among the minorities and hence become a vicious cycle (United Nations 14). The behavior of the employers to avoid employing the minorities cause them to always lack good jobs and therefore vulnerable to poverty.

Sexual Exploitation

Racial discrimination has gone as far as more than economic gain. Sexual exploitation has been noted on the basis of race. CRC found out that children trafficking had become common for sexual and economic purpose. The denial of social rights subjects these people to lose confidence in them (United Nations Cyber School 1).

Steps to stop Racial Discrimination Racial Discrimination can be stopped only if everyone takes responsibility. It must involve individuals and community as whole. Information is the best tool to fight against racial discrimination. What people say should be positive towards other races. Use of arts to promote cohesion among people of different colors and origin can also be of great use. Participation in global network is also important as it will help one to understand the values of other cultures and focus on the positive. People should also learn how to free from racism even at the international level (United Nations Cyber School 1).

At personal level it is important to be well informed on other cultures before discriminating against them. This can be promoted by reading of newspapers, magazines, books and watching movies. One should have friends affiliated to different cultures. Keeping a social circle which consists of people of similar cultural affiliations makes it possible for racial discrimination to be well propagated. Simple statements that may be discriminative should be completely avoided (United Nations Cyber School 1).

Making and performing drama concerts for example in schools can offer an excellent learning that can promote to the shaping of children’s attitude towards other races. The drama concerts should be drawn from the society and should communicate love and cohesion across the different races (United Nations Cyber School 1).

Community development programs should promote discussions and sharing across the races. Education programs area a good platform for the exercise where people can learn about each other. Policies that are made by the United Nations should be practiced. Everyone should know that everyone is a human being in spite of their race. These include:

The right to freedom of movement and residence within the border of the state; The right to leave any country, including ones own, and to return to ones country; The right to nationality; The right to marriage and choice of spouse; The right to own property alone as well as in association with others; The right of freedom of thought, conscience and religion; The right of freedom of opinion and expression; and The right of freedom of peaceful assembly and association. (United Nations Cyber School 1)

Legal perspective of Racial Discrimination The United States has two judicial systems which are state and federal. The State has city, county and trial courts. The Federal court system came after the US got a constitution.

The federal has ninety seven federal district courts. When the constitution was introduced in the United States, it had a major interest of White male citizens only. The representatives per state were only from the whites while all others were excluded. Even the non whites were not counted as the government was calculating the number of persons per state. Article IV of section 3 read:

No person held to service or labor in one state, under the laws thereof, escaping into another, shall, in consequence of any law or regulation therein, be discharged from such service or labor, but shall be delivered up on claim of the party to whom such service or labor may be due. (Flake 1)

The above law was an opening to slavery which lasted until 1865. From 1868; non white Americans got a right to citizenship. From this constitution there was evidence of racism. Later on, amendments were made to eliminate all forms of discrimination including race, religion and servitude (Flake 1).

The US’s Current Fight against Racism The United States has put up some laws to bring down the level of racism. These laws are known as Anti- Racial Discrimination Laws. These laws are from a social legal perspective.

They are made because in some countries racism has become common until it has brought tension to the citizens. As a result the government formulates rules and regulations to govern the country in a manner that will discourage racial discrimination (Solanke 1).

The US law seeks to eliminate racism in both domestic and international level (Randall 1). The US law has given a right to housing to all races through the Fair Housing Act of 1968 and Equal Credit Opportunity Act (ECOA) OF 1974. These laws support all the races and give an equal opportunity to own a house as well as to sell and buy real estates (Solanke 1).

From recent elections in the US, President Barack Obama marked a new time and generation in US. It has been significant since it shows that the white Americans now believe in the ability of other races and especially (Chelala 1).

In the past the federal government was the one that promoted racism. The same government is now working against racial discrimination in the housing sector. The level of effectiveness in implementation varies with an area and time. There are also laws that guard the minority in other sector including insurance and the lending market (The Webbler 1).

Those who break the rules at any level e. g. individual, institutional or cultural should be answerable for their actions. Currently, the government of the United States is regulated by the international experts on how it treats American Indians, Blacks, Latinos and the rest of racial minorities (Rizvi 1).

So far much have been done though not every idea has been achieved. The new constitution clearly indicates that people should not be discriminated under whichever grounds. The education system is being streamlined to allow all to have an equal opportunity (Taylor 1.); an evidence of an attempt to have everybody have an equal opportunity is seen through the implementation if the No Child Left Behind Act.

Since racism is both a moral and political issue, the US government should take maximum responsibility to ensure that all Americans enjoy equal rights regardless of their color (Popular issues 1). The laws and the rules are not enough. The most important thing is to love everyone as human beings. This is referred to as making a color blind society that des not judge according to one’s color (Skillen 1).

Conclusion Racial discrimination is wrong. It degrades other human beings on the basis of their appearance and not their ability. It does not profit but only bring loss and suffering to the victims. In health, education and society people should work towards eliminating racial discrimination.

This should be at both personal and community level. The government should also work towards the same by introducing effective policies towards racism. The government should also ensure that they are followed without fail and that implementation has occurred in every part of the nation.

Works Cited Adams, Maurianne. Readings for diversity and social justice. New York: Routledge, 2000. Print.

Anti Discrimination Commission Queensland. Race. Anti Discrimination Commission Queensland, 2003. Web.

Chelala, Cesar. Is Racism Still Alive in America? Common Dreams, 2010. Web.

Chronicle. Background on Racial Discrimination. Do Something, 2011. Web.

Flake, Monk. Racism. Discrimination and Law, 2011. Web.

Flinders University. Prevent Racial Discrimination. Flinders University, 2008. Web.

Giago, Tim. Native American Veterans claim discrimination by VA in South Dakota. Huffington, 2011. Web.

Kamali, Mosoud. Racial discrimination: institutional patterns and politics. New York: Taylor


The Jungle and Fast Food Nation Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Message Delivery


Works Cited

Introduction The Jungle was a literary novel written by Upton Sinclair to expose the plight of American immigrants and the rot of corruption that went on in the American meatpacking sector (Sinclair 1). Fast Food nation on the other hand, was written by Eric Schlosser to explain the influence of the American fast food industry in the world market (Schlosser 1). The Jungle was written in a fictional setup which reflected the industrial revolution period of America and Fast food nation is no different because it was also written in a fictional setting.

Fast Food Nation was a controversial book when it was published and its fortunes have not changed with its recent publication in 2005. The controversy can be attributed to the fact that, the world still holds very diverse views regarding nutrition, food, production, environment, animal rights and all similar issues highlighted in the book (Kuhl 2).

Part of the controversy was also attributed to claims that, Eric Schlosser was trying to advance the opinion that, all engaged in the business of Hamburger production and beef production did not have peoples’ interest at heart. The Jungle also had its fair share of controversy because it exposed the unsanitary practices which went on in some of Chicago’s meatpacking industry; thereby rubbing all stakeholders explicitly or implicitly mentioned in the novel the wrong way.

Though the books were published at different times, a lot of comparisons have been made between the two publications and consequently, a lot of similarities and differences arise as a result. However, this study establishes that the two books have very little in common.


The intentions of Eric Schlosser in writing Fast food Nation cannot be equated to the intention of Upton Sinclair in writing The Jungle. Though both books talk about the food industry and the ills that plague it, it is important to establish that, Eric Schlosser’s aim of writing Fast Food Nation was to make the public know the problems that plague the American fast food industry and more so, to expose the dishonest practices of managers operating in the sector (Mcconnell 1).

However, Upton Sinclair’s intention of writing the Jungle was not to expose the ills that plagued the meat industry or food industry, but rather, to expose the plight of American immigrants working in America’s industries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This fact can be exposed from the observation that, through Fast Food Nation, Eric Schlosser is seen to focus on the ills that plague the meat industry but in the jungle, only a few pages are dedicated to exposing the ills of the meat industry (Sinclair 2).

This observation can be traced to comments made by some observers that the jungle did not achieve its main objective which was to sensitize the American public about the plight of the American public because the public was more focused on the corruption that went on in the American meat industry. This observation is affirmed by Mcconnell who states that:

“The impact of those stomach churning descriptions on readers sadly caused his true intention to be lost, as American’s demanded something be done about what they were eating. Overtime, Sinclair’s novel came to be described as one about the Chicago meatpacking industry, likely by those who have never read the complete text” (Mcconnell 6).

The focus on the plight of American immigrants in the Jungle can be further emphasized from the focus on the life of Jurgis Rudkus who was an American immigrant. The book focuses not only on his life working in the American meat industry but also on his life as a union leader and a miller (Sinclair 12).

The focus of the book (The Jungle) is therefore centered on the treatment America gave Jurgis Rudkus as he tried to make a living and fend for his family. The Jungle also focuses on the shortcomings of the American immigration and labor laws and how they were used by several technocrats to trample over the rights of the immigrants because they viewed them as expendable.

Upton Sinclair gives a thorough insight into the life of an American immigrant by giving repeated accounts of the plight of Jurgis Rudkus and how he struggled to walk in the snow with nothing more than socks on his feet. He also gives an account of how immigrants lived in old houses and got taken advantage of by ruthless landlords who felt no sympathy for their plight. More accounts of the suffering immigrant children had to go through (like prostituting to put food on the table) are given in the book (Sinclair 22).

The author further focuses on the plight of Jurgis Rudkus and how he lost his family and more especially, his wife, to a rogue public official who never granted her maternity leave which caused her death because she suffered complications from her pregnancy. These events show the author’s focus on the plight of immigrants as opposed to the intrigues of the American meat industry.

We will write a custom Essay on The Jungle and Fast Food Nation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Accomplishments From the differences exposed between the aim of writing Fast food Nation and The Jungle, we see that, both books are very different from each other. Despite the fact that, the authors of both books were great scholars and revolutionists of their time, it is incorrect to compare the two books because they are completely different from each other.

Both authors also have a different sense of accomplishment in delivering their points to their target audience and frankly, Eric Schlosser does a better job at communicating with his audience when compared to Upton Sinclair (Graydyl 2). Eric Schlosser seems to have a better understanding of his facts and he seems to better understand how the capitalistic and socialist systems work.

For instance from his deep understanding of capitalism, Eric Schlosser identifies that, it is difficult to change the status quo prevailing in the fast food industry but more specifically, he acknowledges that it is difficult to change the fast food culture itself (Graydyl 2). On the other hand, the Jungle seems to explore only what is wrong with capitalism and suggest socialism as the better alternative.

For instance, Upton Sinclair states that “Socialism was simply a necessary step towards a far-distant goal, a step to be tolerated with Impatience” (Sinclair 337). Such statements are made in an abstract manner without concrete proof. Eric Schlosser’s authority in writing is well framed than Upton Sinclair’s and this is why The Jungle was misunderstood to talk about the ills that plagued the American meat industry as opposed to the ills that plagued American Immigrant workers.

Message Delivery Fast Food Nation also seems to be more logically structured than the jungle because Fast Food Nation is written to appeal to the general American population but the jungle is written to relate to only a section of the American public (immigrant workers and the working class). Fast Food Nation is also written from an informed point of view with correct utilization of facts and personal experiences to back up the same facts. Most importantly, Eric Schlosser shows how the information advanced in his book can be utilized in the real life.

The Jungle uses a reverse approach, in the sense that, it tries to appeal to the emotional side of human beings by justifying its emotional appeal through logic and reason (an approach which often does not work) (Graydyl 2). This is true because advancing facts via emotions is an abstract method of understanding, and it may fail to hold true in the minds of readers (once the emotion disappears).

However, advancing facts through logic and reason is a guaranteed way of making people understand what one has to say and advancing emotions to supplement the fact is bound to make the information advanced even more effective. Furthermore, considering the fact that, The Jungle is based on a fictional setup, it becomes difficult for the audience to differentiate facts from fiction.

Conclusion The Jungle and Fast Food Nation are very different books which were written to advance different concepts. This study establishes that, Fast Food Nation was written to expose the ills that plagued the American Fast food industry but the Jungle was written to expose the plight American Immigrant workers faced when they worked in American industries. From this point of view alone, it becomes difficult to compare the two books because they were written with different objectives in mind.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Jungle and Fast Food Nation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Moreover, this study establishes that, the two books do not share much commonality because the authors adopted different concepts of analysis in their writing. Fast Food Nation was written to appeal to the logic and reason of its target readers while The Jungle was write to appeal to the emotions of its readers. From this understanding, it becomes clear that, Fast food nation had a stronger impact of comprehension when compared to The Jungle because the major points advanced sunk in.

However, The Jungle failed to communicate its true objectives because of the ambiguities evidenced in its communication strategies. Due to these differences, this study establishes that, comparing The Jungle and Fast food Nation is a misguided concept because the books are totally different from each other.

Works Cited Graydyl. Literary Analysis: Comparing Upton Sinclair’s the Jungle with Eric Schlosser’s Fast Food Nation. 2011. Web.

Kuhl, Ken. Fast Food Nation and the Jungle. July. 2006. Web.

Mcconnell, Rita. Literary Analysis: Comparing Upton Sinclair’s the Jungle with Eric Schlosser’s Fast Food Nation. 2011. Web.

Schlosser. Eric. Fast Food Nation: The Dark Side of the All-American Meal. New York: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, 2001. Print.

Sinclair, Upton. The Jungle. New York: Forgotten Books, 1942. Print.


Human Resource Management at Hewlett Packard Research Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Summary of the case

Reconsidering the management style

Changes in the payment system

The principles of corporate clarity


Reference List

Introduction Hewlett-Packard, a global information technologies corporation has been known for its favorable human resource policies appreciated by the majority of employees. This paper will discuss the changes in the human resource management strategies at Hewlett-Packard which resulted in the loss of the HP way, decrease of the employees’ satisfaction and the increase of the turnover rates and will offer the measures to be imposed for improving the situation.

Summary of the case Founded in 1939 by Bill Hewlett and Dave Packard who started their enterprise in a one-car garage, Hewlett-Packard commonly referred to as HP has grown into a global information technology corporation with its headquarters in Palo Alto, California.

The founders developed a number of management concepts, including the participative management, emphasis on the process and trust and openness in the working relations which have been known as the HP way and became the basis for the employees’ strong satisfaction and the company’s successful growth (Beer


Chinese Censorship Block Chinese People from Creativity Research Paper essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

History of internet in china

Internet censorship in China

Chinese legislations over censorship

Response of the Chinese people to the censorship

The cost of Chinese internet censorship


Works Cited

Introduction Internet has been one of the global most popular sources of information. Its extensiveness in terms of geographical coverage has, for instance, been facilitated by its cheaper cost and developments in technologies. In china an estimate of three hundred and seventy million people are believed to be using the internet.

There has however been a lot of limitation in accessing internet information in the country because the government has moved in to regulate internet usage through censorship. This paper seeks to discuss the censorship issue in China and how it affects creativity of the Chinese people. The paper will look into the history of internet usage in the country, the censorship, effects of the censorship on people’s creativity and the war against government censorship of internet usage in china.

History of internet in china The first application of the internet which was realized through sending an email occurred in China in the year 1987. A series of developments then followed with initiatives from private institutions and government agencies to venture more into the internet technology.

By the following year, Tsinghua University is reported to have started offering email services. With the development of the country’s first browser in the year 1994 and subsequent move by the government to “provide internet accessing services” in the year 1996, the use of the technology began to develop in the country (Enhai 6).

The number of internet users then started increasing in the country from less than a million in the year 1997 to reach almost seventy million in middle of 2003. The increasing trend has since continued and is almost reaching four hundred million by now (Enhai 16).

The history of regulation of the internet usage in the country is reported to have been simultaneously developed with the establishment and development of internet in the country. The government has since the introduction of the technology in the country moved to regulate the way in which its citizens use the internet.

The move is applied by denying citizens access to some websites and restricting access to others. This move has been facilitated by the country’s legislations that have left internet companies with little options in the country. Calls have however been made to the companies to unite and fight the government’s censorship move (James 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Internet censorship in China The move by the government to regulate the internet has been identified as a step to protect itself from fears. Some of these fears are related to the government’s past actions while others are with respect to the forces that citizens can exert against the government.

It is with respect to these reasons that the Chinese government moves to restrict any form of information that is believed to have the capacity to facilitating these threats. Websites or even mail transactions that are suspected to carry such information are therefore either blocked or restricted.

Specifications have been made to past actions by the government and information that relates to “Dalai Lama, the 1989 crackdown on Tiananmen square protestors, Falun Gong, the banned spiritual movement and other internet sites” (New York Times 1) as elements that receives censorship. Such stiff regulations that are also dependent on global temperatures that are believed to have the capacity to influence the Chinese people still do exist.

One of the most recent heightened censorship was realized in the first quarter of the year 2011 at the wake of revolutionary protests that was felt in the Arab world (New York Times para. 2). Following these occurrences, the government of China increased its surveillance over communications by the Chinese people. Communications through emails and even access to the internet was greatly monitored to avert any fear of anti government protests in the country (New York Times para. 2).

The government has been achieving its censorship move through interception of information that is not trusted, according to the government’s standards. The interception is then followed by blocking the information or the site if the government’s fears are significantly triggered.

It is, for example, noted that Gmail services were disrupted by the Chinese government following anti government protests that were realized in Africa and the Middle East in the year 2011 (New York Times para. 4). Actions such as blocking sites that contained the word “freedom” were also realized in the country in the year 2010 and 2011 (New York Times para. 4).

The censorship move was stepped up in around the year 2008 with ensuring that each internet provider company employ a team whose work is to ensure that information with particular content are not posted on their web pages. This was then followed by a move to ban social internet sites such as Facebook and Twiter.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Chinese Censorship Block Chinese People from Creativity specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Another move that started as a regulatory measure over websites that published considerably immoral content such as pornography was later modified to include regulations on information with political contents. In this move, “online discussion forums, instant message groups, and even cell phone text messages in which political and other sensitive issues were discussed received a level of censorship by the government” (New York Times para. 7).

Chinese legislations over censorship The censorship of communication system in China has been developed on two bases. One of the bases is a set of legislations that have been approved to govern the country’s communication systems while the other basis is being fueled by government forces with the aim of protecting their interest in power.

As a result, government forces and influence has used means some of which are not constitutional to ensure that the media is properly contained to guarantee the security of those that are in power. Most of the government censorship measures that are not backed by the country’s constitution are normally done in secret and covered or if exposed to the public, are manipulated and backed by the country’s legal systems.

Some of the major legislations that allows for the censorship of the internet and other media in the country are the “measures on the administration of internet information services and the provisions on the administration of internet news and information services” (Feng 1). The two regulations were enacted in the year 2000 and 2005 respectively.

The measure on administration act, for example, provides that the state reserves the authority to grant permission to any internet provider company in the country. Once allowed to operate in the country, the companies are subject to “prior review and approval and specialized review and approval of the information that they provide to internet users” (Feng 1).

Under these provisions, the government reserves authority which it can use to intimidate the internet companies as they seek permission to venture into the country’s market. Subsequent provision of the act that gives the government, through its agencies, powers to censor any internet information that is deemed to be “harmful” also renders unchecked powers to the government over its regulation of internet companies.

With no clear definition of what constitutes harmful information or the extent to which a piece of information should be considered harmful, the government is at liberty to pronounce an article to be harmful especially if it reveals information that is not favorable to the government. This act therefore gives the Chinese government powers to infringe on the rights of both citizens and the internet companies over expression and information (Feng 1).

The regulations on administration act also have a lot of impacts on the internet services. The necessity of operational permits to internet companies has also played a role in giving the government powers to control the companies. This is due to the intimidating aspects of possible cancellation of permits in case of failure by a company to comply with the demands of the government over the regulation of the internet.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Chinese Censorship Block Chinese People from Creativity by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The definition of information about the government which includes political news and information of economic content among other category of information classifies almost all aspects of news into government regulation.

Diversification of the act over the definition of “harmful information” also restricts the internet companies over the nature of information that they are free to publish without facing censorship from the government. Internet companies are also subjected to evaluation by government agencies that allows for their continuous operations.

Failure by a company to abide by the needs of the government as pertains to the restrictions thus risks a company’s deregistration on the basis of disqualifications over evaluations. Owing to these regulations, the internet companies are forced to resort to self censorship and even yield to cases of government’s censorship in order to be allowed to operate in the country (Feng 1).

Response of the Chinese people to the censorship The Chinese people have registered mixed reactions over the government’s moves that have over time censored the internet. When Google Company was on the verge of pulling out of the Chinese internet market, it had a supportive base from individuals and parties that felt that the government’s move to restrict internet was uncalled for.

This was reflected in the level of disappointment that this group felt when Google gave in to work under the government’s censorship program. It is reported that censorship of the Chinese based Google was for example realized during one of the anniversaries of “the June 4, 1989 Tiananmen square massacre” leading to a public outcry (MacKinnon 63).

It was actually argued that the blockage of the internet service provider was due to the complaint that was widely raised by people. According to MacKinnon Rebecca, “people responded with anger, directed primarily to whoever was creating the blockage” (MacKinnon 63) and many people and even groups were reported to have made public attacks to the party that was responsible for such actions (MacKinnon 63).

Animated internet postings that were labeled “the person who makes it impossible to access Google” (MacKinnon 63) were also common responses at the time. The people at the same time blamed Google for not being strong enough to oppose the government regulatory measures that they considered to be unfair.

It can therefore be perceived that there are a number of Chinese people who are not happy with such censorship. Individuals such as Xiaobo Liu have occasionally come out to openly criticize the government censorship and internet companies that have cooperated with the government in its internet regulation. A good example was his verbal attack on Yahoo following its “political cooperation with the Chinese police” (MacKinnon 41).

Though there have been forces in the country striving to make success in opposing the government’s role in censoring internet access in the country, a majority of the population, especially the younger generation, are reported to not be concerned with the governments move to censor the internet.

This is specifically because this population does not feel the difference between a censored and a free internet due to the lost history of the country which has been partially achieved by the government’s move to regulate information that is passed to the public.

The government has used its powers to only allow for access to history that is favorable to it thus creating a positive influence. A majority of the Chinese have therefore come to believe that their government has every good reason to censor the internet. This may have been facilitated by the government propaganda over the internet (Zhang and Zheng 11).

The cost of Chinese internet censorship With the development of internet technology, educational and general learning set ups were facilitated and developed to give wider opportunities for explorations into topics of interest. It is also through such explorations that individuals and group can develop creativity.

The move to censor internet which has been identified to be the cheapest and most readily available source of information, which include intellectual information, can therefore be seen to hinder developments and innovation through disempowering people. An unrestricted internet system for example has tools that can allow for online learning, research experimentations and innovations. The move by the government to limit access to these facilities therefore restricts innovative creativity among Chinese citizens (Internet 1).

A move to censor the internet has limitations to the benefits that can be achieved from such elements as globalization and advanced technology. These restrictions therefore limit exposure of the Chinese people to the developments that are undertaken outside the country.

Information on political, economical and even social developments in other parts of the world is therefore either not available to the Chinese people or is only availed in limited extents. This is because of one of the governments intentions of shielding the Chinese people from external influences that can negatively affect their opinion over their government. Creativity in the country will with this respect be restricted to their environment that has over time been explored before.

As a result, there will be fewer chances of creativity into new developments that can be realized outside the country’s cultural and environmental factors. Limiting people’s exposure to technological developments is also a factor to limiting creativity in a society. With censorship to sources of information over technologies, a person can, for example, not adequately know how to use that technology in order to generate another technology or even to use the technology to create a new product in the market.

Ciecko argued that a high level of censorship is restrictive to “information flow, creativity and experimentation” (Ciecko 80). The extreme cases of censorships that have been extended to control the content that academic institutions can publish have also been a step that limits research and creativity in these institutions. This can also be extended to cover other research bodies in the country.

Due to the censorship, individuals are restricted from conducting a research and creative exercise in their field of interest thus rendering them redundant and discouraged. This can also discourage other people to loose interest in innovative fields. The censorship has therefore made it unsafe and unfavorable to retrieve or share information (Amnesty 1).

Conclusion The government of China has since the establishment of internet facilities in the country moved to control the use of the services by its citizens. Such regulations were later supported by enactment of regulations in the years 2000 and 2005 that gave the government authority to directly control the services offered by internet companies.

Such regulations have drawn mixed reactions with a number of people and organization protesting against the censorship. A majority of the people have however been influenced by the government to either support the censorship or remain indifferent over it.

This level of censorship has been identified to have negative impacts on creativity in the country. Though the censorship might have succeeded in preserving the interest of the government, it is characterized by disadvantages that have economical and technological impacts and can, in the long run, lead to a revolution for liberalization. There is a need for the government of China to lessen the restrictive measures it has on the internet industry as it in many ways limits creativity of the people of China.

Works Cited Amnesty. Who is affected by internet censorship? Amnesty, 2008. Web.

Ciecko, Anne. Contemporary Asian cinema: popular culture in a global frame. Oxford, UK: Berg Publishers, 2006. Print.

Enhai, Wang. Internet development in the Chinese mainland. Google Documents, 2003. Web.

Feng, Bei. China’s internet censorship system. Human rights in China, 2010. Web.

Internet. A guide for parents, teachers and young people. Standard, 2003. Web.

James, Randy. Chinese internet censorship. Time magazine, 2010. Web.

MacKinnon, Rebecca. CHINA – “Race to the Bottom” Corporate Complicity in Chinese Internet Censorship. New York, NY: Human Rights Watch, 2006. Print.

New York Times. Internet censorship in china. New York Times, 2011. Web.

Zhang, Xiaoling and Zheng, Yongnian. China’s information and communications technology revolution: social changes and state responses. New York, NY: Taylor


Importance of Recycling in Conservation of the Environment Report essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Background information about recycling

Facts about Recycling


Works Cited

Introduction Recycling is the process of reusing materials. It could also be termed as the act of processing used materials that ought to be disposed as waste into new products. The process mainly aims at conserving resources through prevention of wastage of materials that could be used in other ways, reduction of utilization of new raw materials and reduction of energy usage and pollution (air, water and land).

Recycling has become a very essential process in today’s world especially due to the deterioration of the environment brought about by aspects like pollution and global warming. This piece of work looks at the different aspects associated with the process of recycling with much emphasis being given to the history of recycling and the facts associated with recycling process.

Background information about recycling California Environmental Protection Agency Integrated Waste Management Board (2) asserts that recycling has been practices for quite a long period of time (as long as nature and human beings have existed). Recycling can be traced back to many years ago for example where there was some recycling of dinosaurs to produce oil and gas in California.

This was made possible through formation of sedimentary rocks from the remains that would turn into oil and gas through subjection to heat and pressure. The change of lifestyle for instance from nomadic life to a more settled lifestyle also led to accumulation of wastes that necessitated some means of managing the waste hence improvising of way of disposal which entailed some aspects of recycling.

The coming up of organizations for instance churches and governmental bodies that had a vision of having a healthy nation also led to adoption of recycling oriented activities aimed at making the earth a better place to live in. Traditionally, recycling was mainly undertaken to avoid wasting resources and avoid diseases. The concept of conserving the environment and natural resources was not a key consideration.

This could be as a result of the availability of adequate natural resources with a relatively less densely populated world. The reasons behind recycling have however changed day by day as people’s needs keep on changing with the major reason being the conservation of the scarce resources that the rising population keeps at risk. Other reasons include creation of jobs and improvement of the economy.

Some of the notable recycling strategies involve the use of waste paper to make new paper in Japan in 1031 BC, production of paper from materials different from the traditional cotton and linen in England in 1801 BC, and establishment of a material recovery facility in the city of New York in the year 1897 among others.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Today, there are many programs and strategies that have been put in place for the purpose of recycling waste products with an aim of conserving the environment and saving on the scarce natural resources. This is a way of achieving environmental sustainability for the sake of the current society as well as the future generations.

Facts about Recycling According to Grabianowski (par 2), recycling is not a complex concept and entails taking something which is considered to be non-valuable and turning it into a completely new product rather than throwing it away as a waste product. It could range from simple acts of finding how an old item could be utilized in a different way, to complex procedures that entail collection of various items, assigning them to form fresh raw materials and making new products for consumer consumption.

Although the recycled products are of a lower quality than original ones, they are still appropriate for use and recycling cannot be taken for granted due to the benefits associated with it especially in regard to environment conservation for the sake of the current as well as the future generation.

Recycling is a very significant process in today’s world. This is due to the fact that there is increased use of the scarce natural resources leading to their depletion and lack of strategies like recycling would mean insufficiency of basic products. The production of a wide range of waste by the rising population would also mean that there is need for a lot of space for disposal.

Other factors that necessitate the undertaking of recycling processes include the need to protect the environment from any form of harm especially through human activity and conservation of the natural resources in an effort to avoid their depletion which would make living unbearable (all-recycling-facts. com par 6).

There are various benefits accrued to the recycling process. Individuals and families have been able to not only earn but also save money by avoiding unnecessary costs Anonymous (par 4).

Programs like pay-as-you-throw also facilitate saving. Recycling programs are also relatively cheap as compared to the costs that could be incurred in managing wastes for instance in collecting and disposing them. Job creation is also a positive contribution of recycling processes where different individuals are able to secure job opportunities in various recycling industries for example those involved with waste management and effective disposal.

We will write a custom Report on Importance of Recycling in Conservation of the Environment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Recycling is also associated with building of a strong economy through the combination of aspects like cost reduction, creation of jobs, allowing for efficient utilization of energy among others. In regard to the environment, recycling has proved to be a very positive attribute towards conservation.

Recycling of paper for example saves trees that could otherwise be cut for production of new paper. There is also lots of energy saved through recycling. Air and water are also kept safe through reduction of pollution as recycling reduce emissions including green gas emissions.

Natural resources such as minerals are also conserved and the need for mining reduced hence avoiding aspects of loss of biodiversity and soil erosion. Recycling also builds community through bringing people together through common causes and objectives where they participate in recycling movements that enhance their general relationships.

Recycling is a concept that has been accrued with lot of benefits and has therefore received a lot of support from various agencies and governments. This has made its future very bright with much achievements expected to be met through the various recycling programs that have been set up in various organizations and institutions as well as homesteads (Arms para. 9).

Conclusion It is evident that recycling is a very crucial aspect especially when it comes to conservation of the environment. It allows for living in a greener environment which is achieved through conservation of natural resources, reduction of wastes as well as pollution and its effects.

The environment is a very essential element and should always be protected and conserved under all circumstances irrespective of the costs involved. Various strategies should be put in place for instance educational campaigns aimed at encouraging environmental friendly operations and engagement in activities that are geared towards conserving the environment.

Works Cited All-recycling-facts. “Com. Eco Green Living


Overworking Problem Expository Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction More often than not, people overwork themselves without noticing. Overworking is a problem that is deeply rooted in many professional fields like education, politics, and business (Swenson, 1984). Overworking can be described as performing duties beyond the recommended time and measure. Many people overwork in pursuit of success or because the nature of their jobs and activities that they engage in demand so.

If not controlled, overworking may generate to a major health issue for individuals involved. Besides health, overworking can wreck havoc into ones social life as well as family (Rosenzweig, 1983). It can also affect productivity of workers and performance in students. Most of these individuals normally do not see the need to do anything else outside their scope of work. They willingly or unwilling extend working hours and they are normally the first to report to their stations.

Information A number of solutions exist for this problem. However, some in-depth information has to be gathered and analyzed to aid in formulating the solution to overworking. The different kinds of information needed include; causes, industries, or professional fields where it is most prevalent, prevalence, facts about overworking and ways to remedy it.


There are many causes of overworking. They range from personal decisions to professional requirements. Overworking can also be because of habit formation. A proper understanding of the causes is critical to finding a solution to the above problem


It is also important to understand the extent to which the problem is affecting people. Any prevalence rate is an acknowledgement that the problem exists and it needs to be tackled. A high prevalence rate will indicate a troubling trend where people will be dictated by their work hence living like robots.


This will largely involve the figures and proven hypotheses about overworking. They will help paint the true picture on prevalence and the extent to which overworking is a problem. Facts will also help identify areas where the problem is pronounced for remedies to be formulated.

Fields most affected

These professional fields report the most pronounced occurrence of the problem of overworking.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Remedies

There are many suggested ways of dealing with the problem. These will be analyzed to determine the best way to tackle the problem. The remedies will be formulated from the information that will be gathered and evaluated.

Evaluation process

The information gathered has to be of high quality. The valuation process will be based on authority of the information, its objectivity, quality, coverage, and its currency.


Authors of the information regarding overworking have to be known and credible. They must be backed by credible publishers and they must be well versed to speak authoritatively on the topic. The author must have proven credentials and must have reputation among his peers. The information by this author has to be well researched for it to be credible.


The information on overworking must be clear on the goals of its publication. The information must be informative, educative and be able to display coherence on the topic of discussion. The information must also display objectivity while the language should be free of emotion generating words. Where there may be bias, the author must acknowledge and give reasons why.


The information must be well organized with logical sequence and clear presentation of main points. The main ideas must be unified to for the achievement of the overreaching idea. The flow must be in order with no repetition of the author. Data presented on the topic of overworking must be accurate and clear with references of the sources made.


The information must be up to date with the publishing date not more than five years old. This will help in portraying the true picture of the overworking problem as it is presently. It is also imperative to use current books since this problem is dynamic. This therefore calls for the use of materials from authors who regularly publish reports on overworking.

Library resources

The university library is endowed with resources that will partly help in this evaluation process. Key among them is the National Faculty Directory that will come in hand in verifying the author’s credentials. The university library is also connected to the internet through which students access numerous scholarly databases.

We will write a custom Essay on Overworking Problem specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The encyclopedia of Associations and the Research Centers Directory accessed through the library net will help in verifying the objectivity of the information collected. The magazines for libraries and other sources like Ulrich’s International Periodicals Directory, both accessible through the web will help in evaluating quality and relevance of the information. Other websites like Wildcat and Amazon will also help in determining if the information is up to date.

Finding the solution

After the information is analyzed, it will be availed in both print and electronic format for all students and professionals to read. The report will identify ways through which one can determine if one is overworking him/herself and the remedies available to them.

References Rosenzweig, R. (1983). Eight Hours for What We Will. New York: Syndicate Press.

Swenson, R. (1984). The Overload Syndrome: Learning to Live Within Your Limits. New York: Oxford University Press.


Developing Professional Knowledge to Create Professional Success Essay a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA)


Reference List

Introduction Professional knowledge and skills are essential aspects in every individual as they enhance success in the activities and processes undertaken. This is because the knowledge and abilities enhance capability, efficiency as well as effectiveness. There is a risk of the knowledge and abilities being non useful if they are not developed through application and hence the need to have various professional bodies and associations to nurture them (Nour, 2008).

This piece of work looks at how the development of professional knowledge and abilities lead to career success. I have a lot of interest in the field of accountancy and hence have decided to take the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) as the professional association of study in this paper. I have some understanding on the association since I have attended various conferences through which I have gathered considerable information.

The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants is an international professional organization meant for all certified public accountants (CPA). AICPA is a very essential professional institute that has in a great way helped in the development of professional knowledge in the field of accountancy.

This has been through the provision of services aimed at developing the accounting knowledge and abilities to ensure that all professionals in this field are well equipped to allow them to carry out their activities diligently and result to overall success in their career.

Accounting is a relatively complex field that touches of financial related aspects that require adequate development of professional knowledge and abilities to be successful. It involves the recording, classification, analyzing and interpretation of transactions. It is therefore a very critical element in any business organization that aims to succeed.

Some of the services offered by the AICPA to its members to facilitate professional knowledge development include participation in various activities of the organization in an effort to allow them to be conversant with what goes on in the field of accountancy, provision of career news that help in improving their career through utilization of emerging information, provision of leadership skills among others (Baker, 2011).

The development of professional knowledge and abilities made possible by the AICPA allows those in the field to carry out their duties and responsibilities in a professional manner hence attaining success through ensuring satisfaction of all the people served.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The association has also helped in placing accountancy as a very important field in the business world and those with the skills usually secure job opportunities very easily as their services are highly appreciated. AICPA has proved to be very essential in shaping people’s perceptions towards their career and they tend to appreciate it thus carry out their duties effectively.

The professional knowledge and abilities gained from membership in AICPA cannot be underemphasized as it plays a great role in enhancing one’s career. It for example acts as an identification of a professionally qualified individual which is depicted by an individual’s professional behavior, expertise as well as general performance.

The ability to network which is facilitated by the association is also an advantage accrued to the members as they are able to learn a lot from the people with whom they have a common interest and thus keep their career growing day by day (Williams, 2010).

Conclusion It is evident that the aspect of developing professional knowledge and abilities is very crucial in achieving success in any given career. Career success is achieved through a combination of various aspects for instance professional skills and knowledge as well as being goal oriented.

This allows individuals to be able to balance their personal life and work life and thus achieve success in their careers. Professional associations such as the AICPA are therefore crucial as they promote development of professional knowledge and overall career success through provision of guidance and services relevant to specific professional fields.

Reference List Baker, L. (2011). About the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants. Web.

Nour, D. (2008).Relationship Economics: Transform Your Most Valuable Business Contacts into Personal and Professional Success. New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons.

We will write a custom Essay on Developing Professional Knowledge to Create Professional Success specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Williams, T. (2010). Positioning For Professionals: How Professional Knowledge Firms Can Differentiate Their Way To Success. New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons.


Measuring the Depth of Despair: When There Is no Point in Living Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Life poisoned with a drop of despair is truly unbearable. Spreading like cancer, the feeling grips body and mind without letting one take a breath. This haunting emotion is something that one cannot deal with o his/her own – the incredible tension within breaks the person down, crushing the very stem of what makes a man – the belief. With his incredible ability to see the truth under the thick layer of lies, Thoreau managed to notice that despair is the integral part of what makes a man.

Considering Shakespeare’s most famous tragedies, Hamlet and Macbeth, one will inevitably see that Thoreau was speaking the sad truth. Despite the power and the fortune that the lead characters of the plays possessed, they were still seized by the tormenting feeling that was devouring their very self.

Hamlet is completely desperate, there can be no doubt about that. Surrounded by lies and treachery, with not a single person to trust in, he becomes an outcast, willingly isolating himself from the society. It is evident that the life with the people who have betrayed him once is completely impossible for him. The very strain of the situation that Hamlet got trapped in is burst out together with his lonesome cry: “O God! God! How weary, stale, flat and unprofitable, Seem to me all the uses of this world!” (Shakespeare).

Torn apart by the conflict within, Hamlet is in the pit of despair, and, like a fox pursued by the hound, he cannot stop being cautious even for a moment. Together with his father’s murder, he faces the necessity to live with the traitors and pretend to know nothing, which his grief and despair stems from. Shocked by the lies that his mother and his uncle were trying to feed the prince with, Hamlet seeks his consolation in his friendship with Horatio, yet even this one true friend cannot take away the pain within:

Thrift, thrift, Horatio! the funeral baked meats Did coldly furnish forth the marriage tables. Would I had met my dearest foe in heaven Or ever I had seen that day, Horatio! My father! – methinks I see my father (Shakespeare)

However, because of the threat that the prince is subject to, he must keep silent, which is why his despair is silent – as Thoreau said, this is the “quiet desperation” that is already interwoven into Hamlet’s pattern of life. This splinter cannot be extracted from Hamlet’s heart, and he is doomed to bear this dull pain till the day he dies.

However, together with the anguish, there is one more feeling that makes the despair even more unbearable, though it seems impossible, and that is the sting of revenge.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Tramped into mud and stamped on with the feet of his own brother, Hamlet’s father honor must be restored, which the prince understands – or, it should be said, feels – well enough. All pierced with helplessness and rage, Hamlet’s words show clearly that his despair is doubled with the need to take revenge on his uncle Claudius: ”If it assume my noble father’s person, I’ll speak to it, though hell itself should gape.

And bid me hold my peace” (Shakespeare). With his hands clenched in fists of rage, the lead character of the tragedy can do nothing; all that he is left with is waiting for the day of his own death to come. Growing increasingly suspicious, Hamlet becomes the prisoner of his own fears, which only makes his despair grown stronger.

Another specimen of how easily people get caught into the trap of despair is Shakespeare’s famous Macbeth. Although the feeling that nudges on the heart of the lead character is caused by different reasons, the diagnosis stays the same – Macbeth is destined to live with despair in his heart until he rests in peace.

Despite the entirely different settings and plot, this play proves Thoreau’s idea of a man doomed to living with despair in his heart as well. This is even more incredible because of the dramatic gap between the characters, one of them a haunted victim of treachery, another being a cold-blooded murderer himself.

Even though Macbeth is definitely a man of great vice and a traitor, there is still something that makes one sympathize with his fate. What can be the route of this unnatural compassion? Perhaps, the character of Macbeth is much more than skin deep.

One might seek the root of Macbeth’s despair in the fear that the crime committed by his wife will finally come out; like a prisoner trying to escape, he knows his guilt, and the guilt presses on him hard. Yet the fear to be caught, punished and dishonored is to the only reason for Macbeth to feel desperate. Considering the following passage:

They have tied me to a stake; I cannot fly, But, bear-like, I must fight the course. What’s he That was not born of woman? Such a one Am I to fear, or none (Shakespeare),

We will write a custom Essay on Measuring the Depth of Despair: When There Is no Point in Living specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More one can figure out that Macbeth fears not only the legal punishment, nor being lynched by the crowd. If tracing the roots of his despair more thoroughly, one can come to the conclusion that Macbeth is afraid of the twists of fate. Indeed, the feeling of being lead by the hand of the fate and commit the most terrible crimes as it has been prescribed by the almighty Parcae. Because of the sin that is looming over him, Macbeth must bear this burden for the rest of his life, which actually brings this character closer to Hamlet.

However, another fit of despair that seizes Macbeth comes after the news of his wife’s death. This is quite a different feeling, with the air of recklessness and the will to end the sufferings. As Macbeth learns the news about his wife’s death, it seems as if he would gladly share her fate:

She should have died hereafter; There would have been a time for such a word. To-morrow, and to-morrow, and to-morrow, Creeps in this petty pace from day to day To the last syllable of recorded time, And all our yesterdays have lighted fools The way to dusty death (Shakespeare)

Indeed, there is a distinct wish to end the vale of life and rest in peace in Macbeth’s words. Another trap of despair, this unwillingness to live roots both from the lack of inner strength and from the exhausting lies that Macbeth was entangled in. Like a man who is tied hand and feet, he struggles and knows that he is destined to lose.

Like Hamlet, Macbeth finally comes to the idea that life is merely a poorly written play, and that he has already played his part. The curtain closes, and the time has come for the final scene: “Out, out, brief candle!

Life’s but a walking shadow, a poor player That struts and frets his hour upon the stage” (Shakespeare). Both characters played their part and decided to leave. Thoreau was right – each man is destined to suffer, bearing his own share of despair till death takes him/her away. Both tasting their share of suffering, Hamlet and Macbeth are perfect proof to Thoreau’s wise remark.

Works Cited Shakespeare, William.” Hamlet.” The Complete Works of William Shakespeare. N. d. Web. Web.

Shakespeare, William. “The Tragedy of Macbeth.” The Complete Works of William Shakespeare. N. d. Web. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Measuring the Depth of Despair: When There Is no Point in Living by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


How to Boost Your School Performance with the Right Schedule Essay essay help: essay help

College is different in many ways from high school. One difference students quickly notice is that they choose their own schedule in college. This newfound independence can be exciting, but it can also present challenges. Many students are used to having their personal schedules set by their parents or their schools. Students also usually take on more obligations when they enter college, so scheduling your time effectively can be difficult. Here are several factors to consider in choosing your time well and improving your performance in school.

First, consider all the daily obligations in your life. If you are a student, classes will obviously be your main obligation. You will also have to set time aside to study, or else there is little point in going to school. However, most students have many other obligations that go beyond academics.

Some students work a part time job to help pay for school. You may also participate in extracurricular activities at your school. Of course, if you are in a relationship you will need to put time aside to spend with your partner – or you will have an unhappy partner! Likewise, most students have been known to enjoy going to the occasional party.

All these obligations quickly add up. It may be helpful to write down each activity and estimate how much time you need to spend on it each day. You will probably be surprised at how much of your time is taken up by all these obligations. Add up all this time, and compare it to the number of hours you are awake each day. Do not forget to leave a little downtime to relax – spending every waking moment running around busy is not a good idea. You will eventually tire out, and your school performance will suffer as a result.

If you are lucky, you will find that you have plenty of time during the day to get everything done. If you have too much time on your hands, you may want to consider joining a club at school, getting a part-time job, or doing something to keep busy. If you are like most students, though, you may find that you barely have enough hours in the day to complete all of your tasks.

Of course, do not even think about cutting back on sleep to get more done during the day. Not sleeping enough will hurt your performance at school, and leave you with little energy for your other activities. Try to get 7-8 hours of sleep each night to stay refreshed.

If your activities require more time than you have during the day, try ranking each activity in order of importance to you. Naturally, if you are in school, school should be one of your most important obligations (if it isn’t, you may want to reconsider your reasons for attending school).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, other activities may also be important. You may need to work at a part-time job in order to pay for school. Depending on your future career, extracurricular activities may also be important. Other obligations, though, are less important. If you have to choose between studying and partying, you probably should choose partying. Socializing is a normal part of going to school, but not when it comes at the expense of your school performance.

Next, look for ways in which you may be able to free up time in your schedule. Some students form study groups with the ostensible goal of preparing for exams, but spend more time socializing with other members of the group than actually studying. Studying by yourself for 30 minutes may actually be more effective than studying for 90 minutes with a study group.

Not only will you be better prepared for class, but you will have freed up an hour during the day. You should also look into ways to rearrange your class and work schedules to possibly free up more time.

Of course, you should also consider how you are already performing in school. If you are already getting good grades, there is no need to make drastic changes in your daily schedule. A few tweaks may be helpful in freeing up more time, but you should generally continue on the right path.

However, if you are struggling in school you should be more open to completely reconfiguring your schedule. Many students struggle because they are spending too much time on relatively unimportant activities, and not enough time on basic activities like studying. Keeping your focus on the important activities is the best way to boost your school performance.


Brain Diets for Students Many students pay little attention to the food that they eat in college. These students are used to having their parents cook for them as children, and have spent no time thinking about a balanced diet. This can lead to several problems. Most students have heard about the term “Freshman 15.” This refers to the 15 pounds that freshmen often gain as a result of being away from home for the first time and not eating properly.

We will write a custom Essay on How to Boost Your School Performance with the Right Schedule specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, not eating properly can lead to other problems as well. Scientists have concluded that a well-balanced diet is essential to optimizing brain activity. Since college obviously requires students to think carefully and clearly, optimizing brain activity is an important consideration. Unfortunately, many students do not eat well-balanced diets in college. Not only can this lead to an unwanted weight gain, this can also result in decreased brain activity. Of course, the result of this is lower grades.

There are no “magic foods” that cause students to become smarter. Instead, stick to a normal balanced diet. Many students make the mistake of eating one or two of their favorite meals over and over again. These meals are often not healthy to begin with, and constantly eating them only makes things worse. There is nothing wrong with occasionally eating pizza or other junk foods, as long as they are a small part of a balanced diet. A healthy diet obviously needs more than pizza and junk food, though.

Protein is an important part of a healthy brain diet. Protein-rich foods contain amino acids, which are vital for neurotransmitter production. There are two types of proteins – animal and vegetable proteins. Milk, fish, eggs, and poultry are several examples of animal proteins, and they are all great foods for the brain. However, these animal proteins also contain a lot of saturated fat, so they should be eaten only in moderation. Some vegetable proteins include nuts, beans, and whole grains.

To maximize the effects on the brain, balancing proteins with carbohydrates is a great idea. Carbohydrates contain glucose, which works as fuel for the brain. Some foods that contain a lot of carbohydrates are whole grains, fruit, cereal, and vegetables. These foods contain fiber and minerals, so they are good for the body as well as the brain. However, consuming too much glucose will result in increased blood sugar levels. This often results in weight gains, so combining carbohydrates with proteins with every meal is important to counteract this.

Of course, fats are a normal part of a healthy diet as well. For many students, this is the one part of the food pyramid that they have no problem with. Consuming an adequate amount of fatty acids is important for the brain, but too much obviously results in gaining weight. To balance this, try avoiding processed foods and fast foods. Stick to natural animal products, especially fish.

Fish products contain omega-3 fatty acids, which serve to help transmit brain signals. In fact, many scientists believe that fish oils may be the healthiest food for the brain. Studies have shown that Omega-3 fatty acids help brain development in infants. Salmon and sardines are several fish products that contain a lot of Omega-3 fatty acids.

Doctors also believe that these foods help prevent against depression and other mental health issues. Some college students suffer from depression when leaving home for the first time, so a diet containing Omega-3 fatty acids is a great way to prevent this.

Obviously, fish is not a typical part of many students’ diets. Unfortunately, many students consume a lot of trans fats and saturated fats. Foods containing these fats have been shown to negatively affect brain activity. It is probably not realistic to expect students to completely eliminate their intake of trans fats.

Not sure if you can write a paper on How to Boost Your School Performance with the Right Schedule by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Buying fast food is easy, and making actual full-course meals is time-consuming. Most students are busy enough as it is, and do not have the time to prepare healthy meals. However, consuming trans fats as rarely as possible is healthy for the brain.

Students spend hours studying for classes, but rarely consider the effect that their diet has on brain activity. Often, making a few changes to your diet will produce great results. Many students skip breakfast, so simply having a bowl of cereal and some milk in the morning will help.

In other cases, eating a small snack in the middle of the day will help you avoid overeating at dinner. Students interested in maximizing brain activity may want to consider completely overhauling their diet. For most students, though, even these small changes will be healthy for the brain.


Relationships and Studying: Find the Right Balance Like school, relationships demand a lot of time and effort. Finding the right balance between schools and relationships is not always easy. Ideally, your partner should provide support for you as you pursue your studies. Good relationships can be emotionally uplifting, and can help you get through difficult moments at school.

However, even the best relationships can potentially serve as a distraction from your studies. Many students begin their first serious relationships at the same time they enter college, and it can become difficult to balance the two. In trying to keep the right balance, here are several factors to consider.

The most obvious issue is communication. Communication is important in building successful relationships, and it is also important in balancing your relationship with other aspects of your life. Ideally, your partner should know what your educational goals are, and support you as you pursue these goals.

Dating another student can help with this, as long as your partner is as committed to school as you are. Even if your partner is not a student, though, they need to appreciate the importance of education. If your partner is complaining that you spend too much time studying instead of being with them, this is a sign that problems lie ahead.

This leads into the second important issue to consider – time management. Studying for school requires a great time commitment. Relationships require a great time commitment as well. Balancing the two can be extremely difficult. Studying all the time and ignoring your partner is not a good idea if you wish to maintain your relationship.

On the other hands, ignoring your studies to spend all your time with your partner doesn’t make any sense either. A good partner will understand and appreciate this dilemma. Keeping the proper balance between school and your relationship requires you to manage your time well. Setting specific times to study and perhaps a specific night to spend time with your partner is a good idea.

Students also need to think about the relative importance that they place on their education and their relationships. If you expect to go to graduate school or to get a great job after you graduate, you will need to earn excellent grades. This will require you to spend more time studying than normal.

On the other hand, if you are in a serious relationship but have little interest in school, you may want to consider taking a break from school. Taking classes you have no interest in is a waste of time and money. Hopefully, your partner will understand your situation and will support you in your decisions. If they don’t, then you may not have the right partner.

Flexibility is also important in keeping the right balance between school and relationships. In school, there will inevitably be times when your plans change. On a day-to-day level, you may have to cancel a night out with your partner because a professor assigned a last-minute paper. On a deeper level, you may find that your career goals change as you progress through college. Your partner should understand this and support you throughout these changes.

While balancing school and relationships can be difficult, relationships do not necessarily have to have a negative effect on your studies. College can be a stressful time for many students. Your partner can help provide emotional support for you as you go through school. If your partner is a student as well, they can serve as a study partner. A good relationship can give you a sense of purpose. Sometimes, your partner can also serve as a source of motivation.

Trying to balance school and relationships can actually help you learn more about your partner. Does your partner support you in your studies? Do they encourage you to finish studying before going out? If they do, then this shows that you partner is looking out for your best interests. This is a great trait in a partner. On the other hand, if your partner complains that you spend too much time studying, this may be a sign that your partner cares more about themselves than about you. Obviously, this is not a good trend for your relationship.

Many dating experts believe that you learn more about your partner in stressful times then you do when everything is going well. Focusing on school can actually encourage you to get out of a bad relationship quickly before your grades are affected. On the other hand, being in a positive relationship can encourage you to do even better in school. While balancing school and relationships can be difficult, it is a great way to learn more about yourself and about your partner.


The Shift Work Benefit and Problems Research Paper college application essay help

Shift work is a practice involving various individuals working at designated hours outside of established circadian rhythms (Golubic, 2009). In essence, it is a work practice that involves unconventional hours for workers for the benefit of the general public (Winston, 2007).

This benefit takes the form of 24 hour services or longer working hours for businesses enabling the public to utilize services at longer periods during the day or night. These particular types of services are often seen in utility companies such as electric, gas and water companies where ensuring services continue to run at each 24 hour cycle is an integral part of their operational structure.

Other examples take the form of longer operational hours at malls, 24 hour convenience stores, hospitals and various call centers and back office departments which need to employ certain types of shift work in order to meet deadlines and service requests (Winston, 2007). While such an employment practice is inherently beneficial to the community the fact remains that its utilization does pose certain physical, mental and social problems for workers due to the “unnatural” hours that are utilized (Twarog, 2005).

What must be understood is that by nature humans are day oriented creatures; this means that our internal clock (circadian rhythm) is oriented towards daytime activities with a period of rest at night. This regular variation in the 24 hour cycle of human activity actually affects factors such as blood pressure, body temperature, heart rate and even the respiration rate of a particular individual (Szosland, 2010).

This is due to the fact that the body is so used to the variation of the 24 hour cycle that increases or decreases in body functions are already predisposed towards a particular cycle. By changing the cycle that the body is normally used to this in effect causes a destabilization in alertness, health, reaction time and even a person’s mental capacity as the body forces itself to adapt to a new rhythm (Twarog, 2005).

As it can be seen from the enumerated effects of changes to the body’s circadian rhythm, shift work has a high likelihood of negatively affecting a person’s physical and mental capacity.

It must also be noted that not all individuals can successfully adapt to shift work, studies show that a large percentage of individuals show a distinctive clinical intolerance to shift work as showed by symptoms ranging from persistent fatigue and digestive problems to progressive negative changes in behavior and poor sleeping habits (Cotter, 2011).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This particular form of intolerance, labeled as SMS or Shift work Mal-adaption Syndrome, is progressive and actually gets more pronounced and worse the longer a person is exposed to a particular shift work schedule.

The resulting negative manifestations of SMS usually take the form of negative work behaviors such as increased absenteeism, the propensity to be careless in doing their job and various other negative work related behaviors that can actually result in a person getting fired or dismissed from their position.

Another factor to take note of when examining the effect of shift work in various individuals is the fact that the unusual hours required in these particular work schedules in effect isolates a person from normal social interaction. This is due to the fact that when a person with a shift work schedule is working others are asleep and vice versa. The problem with this situation is the fact that humans are inherently social creatures with the need to interact socially on a regular level.

Increased social isolation through shift work has been shown to increase the propensity for depression and other forms of psychiatric disturbances which are definitely detrimental to an employee’s mental well being. It is based on the data presented that this paper will attempt to determine if shift work contributes to high absenteeism, physical, mental and social degradation of employees at the immigration department in Trinidad and Tobago.

It is the belief of this study that by examining the contributing factors of Shift work Mal-adaption Syndrome and comparing them to the case of the immigration department at Trinidad and Tobago this study will be able to see to whether the type of shift work adapted in their case creates negative effects for both the department and it’s employees and if so will recommend possible factors that can be changed in order to improve it.

Reference List Cotter, S. (2011). Seeking Shift Work SOLUTIONS: Shift work can harm sleep, and

sleep loss can lead to fatigue and errors-how is that impacting you and your patients?. EMS World, 40(4), 39-44. Retrieved from EBSCOhost.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Shift Work Benefit and Problems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Golubic, R., Milosevic, M., Knezevic, B.,


how We Redeemed Alabama college admission essay help: college admission essay help

3 pages reflection paper for the reading. In this paper, you must identify and explain their beliefs system, how they were able to galvanize the people, and what was the outcome of their activities in the South. You must cite your sources. The format for your assignment must be 12” font Times New Roman. You must convert your assignment to a PDF and upload it. please i will attach this document. thanks


Educational Credential Evaluators (ECE) Essay custom essay help

Education evaluation is a process that aims at assessing the benefits and impacts of educational programs/systems and initiatives towards various aspects of education. This is achieved through utilization of numerous research methods. Education credential evaluators is a well known organization that is private and non profit making. It works through the preparation of evaluation reports which are aimed at identifying the education qualifications earned in other countries and equating them to the United States equivalents.

The main aim of education credential evaluators is to serve individuals who have attained education in other parts of the world, other than the United States, helping them to be recognized in terms of education qualifications and hence making their education-related undertakings to be successful.

There are various issues associated with education credential evaluators for instance education evaluation services, the process of evaluating foreign education and professional credentials, the process of getting an independent education evaluation, the functions and benefits of ECE, the objects used for evaluation as well as misconceptions. For the purpose of this paper, I will discuss the education evaluation services and the process of evaluating foreign education and professional credentials.

The education evaluation services Education evaluation process entails having a critical and systematic appraisal of the various activities in the education system. Various research methods are utilized. They include collection of data, its analysis and taking of necessary actions based on the analyzed data. Education evaluation methods can be defined as the ideas that are put forth in regard to the teaching strategies and tools for putting into practice effective means of teaching.

The methods allow for setting of achievable goals. The methods include; lesson plans which stipulate the activities carried out in a classroom setting for instance project overview, the education standards followed, how special needs of students are handled and the results achieved after certain measures are taken.

The status of the lesson plans and the teaching skills are used as a gauge to a teacher’s education qualifications. Some of the general services offered by educational credential evaluators include document by document credential evaluation, CV/ resume preparation especially for international placement, work experience evaluation and course by course evaluation. All this services are aimed at placing the particular person being evaluated at a better position to secure an education chance or job opportunity.

The process of evaluating foreign education and professional credentials Evaluation of foreign education and professional credentials is a crucial aspect that is worth looking at. This is because a considerable number of foreign students go to the United States in search of employment or to further their education. The process of evaluating foreign education and professional credentials involves choosing an appropriate evaluator and making a decision on what is essential in getting whatever position is desired.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This however requires that professional evaluators are identified, for instance the trade organization national association of credential evaluation services. The evaluation standards should not be lowered so as to ensure that foreign students and job seekers are offered the quality care that is equivalent to that accorded to the American students with equivalent qualifications.

Education credential evaluators is an organization whose services cannot be underemphasized. It plays a great role in ensuring that foreign students and job seekers are able to integrate well in the United States education systems as well as the job market through matching their qualifications to what is expected in America and hence allowing for necessary changes to be made for the benefit of all. It has been able to achieve this through various bodies and staff who perpetrate the activities therein.